District Auxiliary Offices
AT
Grossmont College
FOR
Grossmont-Cuyamaca Community College District
8800 Grossmont College Drive
El Cajon, California 92019
Prepared by:
gkkworks
1775 Hancock Street, Suite #150
San Diego, California 92110
4998 Corte Playa Palmera
San Diego, CA 92124
gkkworks Project No. 15070-000
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
TABLE OF CONTENTS
000010
000011
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF DRAWINGS
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
010100
SUMMARY
010500
CONSTRUCTION SURVEYING
010600
STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURES
014200
TESTING AND INSPECTION
014300
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
016000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
017300
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
017301
CUTTING AND PATCHING
017700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017801
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017802
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
024119
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE
NOT USED
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
NOT USED
DIVISION 5 – METALS
NOT USED
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
NOT USED
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
NOT USED
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
NOT USED
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
099113
PAINTING
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
104310
SIGNAGE
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
NOT USED
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
NOT USED
TABLE OF CONTENTS
000010 - 1
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
NOT USED
DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS
NOT USED
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
NOT USED
DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
NOT USED
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 01 00
GENERAL PROVISIONS
26 05 19
POWER CONDUCTORS
26 05 26
GROUNDING
26 05 33
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
26 05 34
OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
26 05 43
UNDERGROUND PULL BOXES AND MANHOLES
26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
26 28 16
DISCONNECTS
26 90 90
TESTING
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 01 00
GENERAL PROVISIONS
27 10 00
VOICE – DATA INFRASTRUCTURE
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 01 00
GENERAL PROVISIONS
28 30 00
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
311000
SITE CLEARING
312000
EARTHWORK
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
321216
ASPHALT PAVING
321313
CONCRETE PAVING
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
NOT USED
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
000010 - 2
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
SECTION 000011 - LIST OF DRAWINGS
GENERAL
G001
TITLE SHEET, ABBREVIATIONS, SHEET INDEX & PROJECT INFORMATION
CIVIL
C100
C101
DEMOLITION PLAN
GRADING AND PAVING PLAN
ARCHITECTURAL
AS101 SITE PLAN
A100 FLOOR PLAN, ELEVATIONS, FINISH SCHEDULE, MODULAR BLDG.
REQUIREMENTS
A101 TYPICAL SIGNAGE, ACCESSIBILITY NOTES, RAMP STANDARDS
ELECTRICAL
E1.0
E1.1
E1.2
E2.1
E2.2
E3.1
ELECTRICAL LEGEND AND NOTES
OVERALL SITE PLAN
ELECTRICAL DETAILS
FIRE ALARM SITE AND FLOOR PLAN
FIRE ALARM SCHEDULE AND DETAILS
PANEL SCHEDULE AND DETAILS
END OF LIST OF DRAWINGS
LIST OF DRAWINGS
000011 - 1
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
SECTION 010100 - SUMMARY OF PROJECT
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.03
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions or such other
Conditions/Provisions as may be applicable to this Contract.
PROJECT-WORK COVERED BY ALL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
1.04
Section Includes:
1.
Work covered by Contract Documents for this portion of the project.
2.
Contracts.
3.
Administrative and procedural sections applicable to all Contracts.
Work of the prime Contract shall include the construction of:
1.
Project Title:
District Auxiliary Offices
2.
Project Location:
Grossmont College
8800 Grossmont College Drive
El Cajon, California 92019
3.
Project Description:
a.
The project consists of providing and installing a new 24-foot x 60-foot
modular building (consisting of two 12-foot x 60-foot trailers/units) for
use as District Auxiliary Offices. There will be no students permitted in
this building. The building will be considered Non-Field Act Compliant.
b.
The project location is at the north end of the campus, within Parking
Lot #4 and immediately north of existing modular building for the
Foundation Offices. A portion of the existing landscaped island and
existing parking area is utilized for the project site.
c.
The new site work consists of Building pad grading and preparation,
utility trenching and installation and hardscape (driveway and
sidewalks) and “Landscaped” areas.
d.
The general contractor shall provide and install a complete modular
building structure, including but not limited to foundations, interior and
exterior finishes as specified, HVAC, electrical power and lighting,
data, and telephone, systems.
WORK INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT
A.
B.
The Work Includes: Architectural, Civil, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing and
Landscape.
District may award separate Contracts for products and installation for work as may be
indicated on Drawings as NIC (Not in Contract), including but not limited to:
1.
Exterior and interior signage.
2.
Furniture and furnishings.
3.
Movable equipment.
SUMMARY OF PROJECT
010100-1
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
C.
D.
1.05
The Contract shall consist of the execution and completion of all work described in the
Project Manual and the Drawings, including:
1.
Owner-Contractor Agreement.
2.
General Conditions.
3.
Drawings: All those sheets titled and numbered on the Title Sheet.
4.
Project Manual.
5.
Specifications: All those sections titles and numbered in the table of contents in
the forepart of the Project Manual.
6.
Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract.
7.
Modifications issued after execution of the Contract.
8.
Performance Bond, when required by District.
9.
Labor and Material Bond, when required by District.
CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.08
Perform Work of this Contract under a stipulated sum with the District.
DOCUMENTS
A.
1.07
Cooperate fully with separate Contractors so that work under those Contracts may be
carried out smoothly, without interfacing with or delaying work under this Contract.
The District may award separate Contracts for additional work to be performed at the site
followings Substantial Completion.
CONTRACT
A.
1.06
gkkworks
The Drawings provided with and identified in the Project Manual are the Drawings
referenced in the Agreement.
The location, extent and configuration of the required construction and improvements are
shown and noted on Drawings. The Drawings are referenced in the Agreement. An
index of Drawings is included on the title page of the Drawings.
Drawings are arranged into series according to design discipline. Such organization and
all references to trades, sub-contractors, specialty contractors or suppliers shall not
control the Contractor in assigning the Work among sub-contractors or in establishing the
extent of the work to be performed by any trade.
Where the terms “as shown,” “as indicated,” “as noted,” “as detailed,” “as scheduled,” or
terms of like meaning are used in the Drawings or Specifications, it shall be understood
that reference is being made to the Drawings references in the Agreement.
Where reference to the word “plans” is made anywhere in Drawings, Specifications and
related Contract Documents, it shall be understood to mean the Drawings references in
the Agreement.
CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS
A.
B.
C.
The Specifications provided in the Project Manual are the Specifications referenced in the
Agreement.
Specifications are organized by Divisions and Sections in accordance with the
recommended practices of the Construction Specifications Institute, Such organization
shall not control the Contractor in assigning the work among subcontractors or in
establishing the extent of work to be performed by any trade.
Specifications are included in the Project Manual, which also may include other
documents related to the project, including, but not limited to, Information for Bidders,
SUMMARY OF PROJECT
010100-2
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
Proposal Form or Bid Form, Agreement, Certifications and Attachments, Soils and
Geotechnical Data, Sample Forms and Schedules.
1.09
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS
A.
Provide all Work identified in Divisions 1 through 16 except Work specifically assigned to
other Contractors as may be specified.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01
USE OF PREMISES
A.
CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the Work of all trades, with DISTRICT and/or Separate
Work Contract. CONTRACTOR shall sequence, coordinate, and perform the Work to
impose minimum hardship on the operation and use of the existing facilities and/or
Project site. CONTRACTOR shall install all necessary protection for existing
improvements, Project site, property, and new Work against dust, dirt, weather, damage,
vandalism, and maintain and relocate all protection to accommodate progression of the
Work.
B.
CONTRACTOR shall confine entrance and exiting to the Project site and/or facilities to
routes designated by the District.
C.
Within existing facilities, DISTRICT will remove portable equipment, furniture, and
supplies from Work areas prior to the start of Work. CONTRACTOR shall cover and
protect remaining items in areas of the Work
D.
CONTRACTOR shall utilize all available means to prevent generation of unnecessary
noise and maintain noise levels to a minimum. When required by the District,
CONTRACTOR shall immediately discontinue noise-generating activities and/or provide
alternative methods to minimize noise generation. CONTRACTOR shall install and
maintain air compressors, tractors, cranes, hoists, vehicles, and other internal
combustion engine equipment with mufflers, including unloading cycle of compressors.
CONTRACTOR shall discontinue operation of equipment producing objectionable noise
as required by the District.
E.
CONTRACTOR shall furnish, install, and maintain adequate supports, shoring, and
bracing to preserve structural integrity and prevent collapse of existing improvements
and/or Work modified and/or altered as part of the Work.
F.
CONTRACTOR shall secure building entrances, exits, and Work areas with locking
devices as required by the District.
SUMMARY OF PROJECT
010100-3
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
3.02
G.
CONTRACTOR assumes custody and control of DISTRICT property, both fixed and
portable, remaining in existing facilities vacated during the Work.
H.
CONTRACTOR shall cover and protect surfaces of rooms and spaces in existing facilities
turned over for the Work, including DISTRICT property remaining within as required to
prevent soiling or damage from dust, dirt, water, and/or fumes. CONTRACTOR shall
protect areas adjacent to the Work in a similar manner. Prior to DISTRICT occupancy,
CONTRACTOR shall clean all surfaces including DISTRICT property.
I.
CONTRACTOR shall not use or allow anyone other than DISTRICT employees to use
facility telephones and/or other equipment, except in an emergency. CONTRACTOR
shall reimburse DISTRICT for telephone toll charges originating from the facility except
those arising from emergencies or use by DISTRICT employees.
J.
CONTRACTOR shall protect all surfaces, coverings, materials, and finished Work from
damage. Mobile equipment shall be provided with pneumatic tires.
PROPERTY INVENTORY
A.
3.03
gkkworks
Property, DISTRICT intends to remove, will be removed by DISTRICT before a room or
space is vacated for the Work. Before performing Work in each room or space,
DISTRICT and CONTRACTOR shall prepare a detailed initial written inventory of
DISTRICT property remaining within, including equipment and telephone instruments and
the condition thereof. DISTRICT and CONTRACTOR shall retain a signed copy of the
inventory dated and signed by both parties. Prior to subsequent DISTRICT occupancy of
each such room or space, DISTRICT and CONTRACTOR shall perform a final inventory
of DISTRICT property and all discrepancies between the initial inventory and final
inventory shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR.
FURNITURE, FIXTURES, AND EQUIPMENT
A.
Certain furniture, fixtures, and equipment identified in the Contract Documents may be
furnished and delivered to the Project site by DISTRICT and installed by the
CONTRACTOR.
B.
If designated in the Contract Documents to be DISTRICT furnished CONTRACTOR
installed (OFCI), CONTRACTOR shall unload, store, uncrate, assemble, install, and
connect DISTRICT supplied furniture, fixtures, and equipment.
C.
Ninety (90) days prior to Substantial Completion, CONTRACTOR shall notify DISTRICT
of the scheduled date for installation of furniture, fixtures, and equipment. Upon delivery
to the Project site, CONTRACTOR shall store furniture, fixtures, and equipment inside
rooms and/or protected spaces. DISTRICT will sign receipt or bill of lading as applicable.
D.
CONTRACTOR shall, within ten (10) days after delivery, uncrate and/or unpack furniture,
fixtures, and equipment in presence of IOR who shall inspect the delivered items. IOR
shall prepare an inspection report listing damaged or missing parts and accessories. IOR
SUMMARY OF PROJECT
010100-4
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
shall transmit one copy of the report to DISTRICT and CONTRACTOR. DISTRICT will
procure and/or replace missing and or damaged furniture, fixtures, and equipment.
E.
CONTRACTOR shall install furniture, fixtures, and equipment in the locations and
orientation as indicated in the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall verify exact
locations with DISTRICT prior to final installation of furniture, fixtures, and equipment.
F.
If required, DISTRICT will furnish setting and or placement drawings for furniture, fixtures,
and equipment.
G.
CONTRACTOR shall install furniture, fixtures, and equipment by proper means and
methods to ensure an installation as recommended by the manufacturer. CONTRACTOR
shall furnish and install all necessary fasteners and required blocking to properly install
furniture, fixtures, and equipment.
H.
CONTRACTOR shall install furniture, fixtures, and equipment with manufacturer
recommended fasteners for the type of construction the furniture, fixtures, and equipment
are being fastened and/or anchored to.
I.
CONTACTOR shall provide final connections of any electrical, signal, gas, water, waste,
venting and/or similar items to furniture, fixtures, and equipment. CONTRACTOR shall,
prior to final connection, verify the operating characteristics of furniture, fixtures, and
equipment are consistent with the designated supply.
END OF SECTION 010100
SUMMARY OF PROJECT
010100-5
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
SECTION 010500 - CONSTRUCTION SURVEYING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Surveying requirements for the Work.
A.
B.
C.
D.
RELATED SECTIONS
Section 311000: Site Clearing
Section 312000: Earthwork
Section 321216: Asphalt Paving
Section 321313: Concrete Paving
1.2
1.3
SURVEY SERVICE
A.
1.4
Unless otherwise stated by the Architect or noted in the Special Provisions, the CONTRACTOR
shall provide all surveying services.
PAYMENT FOR SURVEYING
A.
The payment for surveying shall be included in respective items of work and shall include, but
not to be limited to, construction staking, location and/or relocation of conflicting utilities, locating
survey monuments, setting of survey monuments and center line ties, preparing and filing
centerline tie sheets and Corner Records, locating Bench Marks and notifying the Office of the
County Surveyor of same, professional office services and field calculations, and furnishing all
labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals for doing all work involved. No additional
compensation shall be allowed unless a separate bid item is provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SUBMITTALS
A.
CONTRACTOR shall submit the name and address of the State of California licensed surveyor
to CMR, ARCHITECT and OWNER including any changes as they may occur.
B.
CONTRACTOR shall submit to OWNER and/or ARCHITECT copies of cut sheets, coordinate
plots, data collector printouts, and other documentation as available to verify completeness
and/or accuracy of field surveying work.
C.
Statement of Compliance: CONTRACTOR shall submit a statement of certification signed and
sealed by Surveyor, counter-signed by CONTRACTOR indicating compliance with grade
elevations, slopes and tolerances.
3.2
LAYOUT OF THE WORK
A.
CONTRACTOR shall employ a State of California licensed surveyor to lay out the entire Work,
set grades, lines, levels, control points, vertical and horizontal control, elevations, grids and
CONSTRUCTION SURVEYING
010500 - 1
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
positions. Before the commencement of Work, surveyor shall, in conjunction with OWNER and
CMR provided engineering survey of the Project site, locate all reference points and
benchmarks, then lay out all lines, elevations, and measurements for the entire Work including
but not limited to, buildings, grading, paving and utilities.
B.
All work under this contract shall be built in accordance with the lines and grades shown on the
plans. Field survey for establishing these, and for the control of construction, shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor. All such survey work including construction staking shall be
done under the supervision of a California Licensed Land Surveyor or authorized Civil Engineer.
Staking shall be done on all items ordinarily requiring grade and alignment, at intervals normally
accepted by the agencies and trade involved.
C.
The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any errors in the finished work, and shall notify the
Engineer, in writing, within 24 hours, of any discrepancies, or design errors during the
construction staking.
D.
Contractor shall immediately remediate any areas found not to meet specification requirements.
3.3
PERMANENT SURVEY MARKERS
A.
Prior to the start of construction, the Contractor’s licensed Land Surveyor or qualified Civil
Engineer shall, in conformance with Section 8771 of the California State Business and
Professions Code, locate all monuments (both of record and not of record), bench marks, and
centerline ties within the construction zone, i.e., within one hundred feet of the construction
activity. Additional ties to monuments shall be set when ties are missing (min. 4 ties per
monument). The Contractor’s Surveyor or qualified Civil Engineer shall prepare and submit for
review to the City Engineer separate tie sheets and Corner Record sheets (monuments not of
record shall have only tie sheets prepared). Corner Records shall conform to the County
Engineers’ Association of California’s “Guide to the Preparation of Records of Survey and
Corner Records” document as provided by the County Surveyor’s Office. Upon review by the
City Engineer, the Land Surveyor shall file the Corner Records with the County Surveyor’s
Office. Certified Corner Records shall be filed with the City Engineer of the City that the work is
being completed in.
B.
After construction and prior to final acceptance by the Owner of the construction project, the
Contractor’s land surveyor or qualified Civil Engineer shall re-survey all field monuments and
centerline ties within the construction zone, prepare tie sheets and Corner Record sheets as
indicated above, and file them with the City Engineer for review. After review by the City
Engineer, the Land Surveyor shall file the Corner Records with the County Land Surveyors
Office, and file certified copies of the Corner Records with the City Engineer.
C.
All survey monuments removed or altered as a result of construction shall be reset, Corner
Records filed with the County Surveyor’s Office, and approved final Corner Records filed with
the City Engineer. Centerline ties removed as a result of construction shall be reset and tie
sheets filed with the City Engineer.
D.
The Land Surveyor shall provide a letter of certification for all monuments having four or more
existing ties which are within 0.02 ft plus or minus of the original City tie sheet records. When
several monuments and ties appear on one tie sheet and one of the ties has changed the Land
Surveyor shall re-measure all of the ties and re-file a new tie sheet with the City as required
herein.
CONSTRUCTION SURVEYING
010500 - 2
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
E.
3.4
gkkworks
County of San Diego permanent and temporary bench marks within the construction zone shall
be located by the surveyor, and the Contractor’s Land Surveyor shall send a written notification
of impending construction to the County of San Diego Surveyor’s Office two weeks prior to
construction.
SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Establish a minimum of two permanent horizontal and vertical control points on the Project site,
remote from the building area, referenced to data established by the survey control points.
B.
Indicate the reference points on the project record drawings with the basis of elevation being the
established benchmarks.
C.
Establish lines, grades, locations and dimensions by instrumentation. From time to time, verify
the layout of all Work by the same methods.
D.
Provide grade stakes and elevations to construct over excavation and re-compaction, rough and
final grades, paved areas, curbs, gutters, sidewalks, building pads, landscaped areas, and other
areas as required.
E.
Calculate and layout proposed finished elevations and intermediate control as required to
provide smooth transitions between the spot elevations indicated in the Contract Documents.
F.
Provide stakes and elevations for grading, fill, and topsoil placement.
G.
Provide adequate horizontal and vertical control to locate utility lines, including but not limited to,
storm, sewers, water mains, gas, electric and signal and provide vertical control in proportion to
the slope of the line as required for accurate construction. Dry utilities will be based upon
adequate horizontal and vertical control layout. Prior to trench closure, survey and record invert
and flow line elevations. Survey and record top of curb and flow line elevations on finished
concrete or AC surfaces at key locations such as BC’s, EC’s, grade breaks, corners or angle
points in sufficient number to demonstrate the Work complies with the intent of the Contract
Documents.
H.
Provide horizontal and vertical control for batter boards for drainage, utility, and other on-site
structures as required.
I.
Furnish building corner offsets as required to adequately locate building pads. Provide cut and
fill stakes within the building pad perimeter adequate to control both over excavation and recompaction and the final sub-grade elevation of the building pad.
J.
Submit a certification, signed by the surveyor, confirming the elevations and locations of
improvements are in conformance with the Contract Documents. The statement shall
include survey notes for the finish floor and building pad, showing the actual measured
elevations on the completed sub-grade, recorded to the nearest 0.01’. Building pad tolerance
will be +- 0.10’.
3.5
ESTABLISHMENT OF GRADES IN HARDSCAPE AREAS
A.
All work shall conform to the lines, elevations, and grades shown on the Grading Plans. Three
consecutive points set on the same slope shall be used together so that any variation from a
straight grade can be detected. Any such variation shall be reported to the Engineer. In the
CONSTRUCTION SURVEYING
010500 - 3
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
absence of such report, the Contractor shall be responsible for any error in the grade of the
finished work.
B.
Areas having drainage gradients of 2 percent or more shall have elevation stakes, set with
instrument, at grid intervals of 25 feet. Intermediate stakes may be set by using a tightly-drawn
string line over the tops of adjacent stakes. Grade stakes must be set at all grade breaks,
grade changes, etc.
C.
Areas having drainage gradients of less than 2 percent shall have elevation stakes, set with
instrument, at 10 foot intervals. Grade stakes must be set at all grade breaks, grade changes,
etc.
D.
Protect and maintain stakes in place until their removal is approved by the Owner. Grade or
location stakes lost or disturbed by Contractor, shall be reset by the Surveyor at the expense of
Contractor.
3.6
STORM DRAIN & SANITARY SEWER PIPE INSTALLATION
A.
3.7
All storm drain pipelines, sanitary sewer pipelines, trench drains, catch basins, cleanouts and
drain inlets shall be staked by a licensed surveyor if slope of grade is less than 2% and a
complete set of cut sheets shall be supplied to the Inspector. All construction staking shall be
installed and verified for grade and alignment prior to the start of construction.
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Upon Substantial Completion, CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for reproducible
transparencies of the as built survey drawings. Deliver to ARCHITECT, final “record” drawings
of the original drawings and completed Work within specified tolerances.
B.
Record drawings shall indicate locations by coordinate of all utilities onsite with top of pipe
elevations at major grade and alignment changes, rim grate or top-of-curb and flow line
elevations of all drainage structures and manholes.
C.
Completed record drawing transparencies shall be signed and certified as correct and within
specified tolerances by the licensed surveyor.
D.
Attention is called to other sections of the Contract Documents requiring verification or
measurements of installed Work by survey. Surveyor shall perform and certify all such surveys
or verification are completed in accordance with the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION 01050
CONSTRUCTION SURVEYING
010500 - 4
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
SECTION 010600 - STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURES
1.1
1.2
General: The Contractor shall exercise every reasonable precaution to protect channels, storm
drains, and bodies of water from pollution.
A.
Conduct and schedule operations to minimize or avoid muddying and silting channels,
drains, and waters.
B.
As required, obtain permits for erosion and water pollution control from the appropriate
jurisdictional agency before starting Work.
C.
Provide any necessary water pollution control devices to prevent, control, and abate
water pollution, and implement good housekeeping pollution control measures to reduce
the discharge of pollutants from work sites to the maximum extent practicable. These
water pollution control devices include drains, gutters, slope protection blankets and
retention basins and shall be constructed concurrently with other Work at the earliest
practicable time.
D.
Exercise care in preserving vegetation and protecting property, to avoid disturbing areas
beyond the limits of the Work. Promptly repair any damage caused by Contractor
operations.
E.
Comply with the specific requirements based on acreage of disturbed soil.
F.
Penalties: Failure to comply with this Section may result in significant fines and possible
imprisonment. The RWQCB or other prosecuting authority may assess fines of up to
$32,500 per day for each violation. Should the Owner be fined or penalized as a result of
the Contractor failing to comply with this Section, the Contractor shall reimburse the
Owner for any and all fines, penalties and related costs.
G.
Notification and Report: If pollution occurs in the work area for any reason or when the
Contractor becomes aware of any violation of this Section, correct the problem and
immediately notify the Inspector. In addition, submit a written report to the Engineer
within seven (7) calendar days describing the incident and the corrective actions taken. If
either the Inspector or Engineer is first to observe pollution or a violation, the Contractor
shall also explain in the written report why the Work was inadequately monitored.
H.
The provisions of this Section describe minimum compliance and do not preclude other
more stringent stormwater pollution control measures that may be required in the
Contract.
Definitions
A.
1.3
“Construction activity": Operations such as clearing, grading, disturbances to the ground
such as stockpiling, or excavation that results in soil disturbances. If construction activity
is part of a larger common plan of development, the amount of disturbed soil is the total
land area of disturbed soil that results under the common plan.
Payment: All costs for work required for compliance with this Section shall be included within the
Bid Prices for other items of work.
STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURES
010600 - 1
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
1.4
2.1
gkkworks
Liabilities & Penalties:
A.
Payment of penalties for non-compliance by CONTRACTOR shall be the sole
responsibility of CONTRACTOR.
B.
Compliance with the Clean Water Act pertaining is the sole responsibility of
CONTRACTOR. Any fine against OWNER due to non-compliance by CONTRACTOR,
OWNER shall recover all costs of the fine by appropriate OWNER Assessment.
Construction activity: Comply with the following minimum water quality protection requirements.
A.
Retain eroded sediments and other pollutants on-site and do not allow transportation
from the site by sheet flow, swales, area drains, natural drainage, or wind. Control slope
and channel erosion by implementing an effective combination of best management
practices (BMPs). Such BMPs include scheduling grading during non-rainy seasons,
planting and maintaining vegetation on slopes and covering erosion-susceptible slopes.
B.
Protect stockpiles of earth and other construction-related materials from being
transported from the site by wind or water.
C.
Properly store and handle fuels, oils, solvents, and other toxic materials to not
contaminate the soil or surface waters, enter the groundwater, or be placed where they
may enter a live stream, channel, drain, or other water conveyance facility. Protect all
approved toxic storage containers from weather. Clean spills immediately and properly
dispose of cleanup materials. Spills shall not be washed into live streams, channels,
drains, or other water conveyance facilities. IF RAIN OR STORM WATER RUN OFF
COMES IN CONTACT WITH POLLUTANTS (SUCH AS SOIL STABILIZERS, PAINT OR
FLUID FROM VEHICLES) REPORT TO INSPECTOR IMMEDIATELY. CONTRACTOR
WILL BE REQUIRED TO SAMPLE AND REMEDIATE CONTAMINATED WATER.
D.
Do not wash excess or waste concrete into the public way or any drainage system.
Retain concrete wastes on-site until they can be appropriately disposed of or recycled.
E.
Deposit trash and construction-related solid wastes in covered receptacles to prevent
contamination of rainwater and dispersal by wind.
F.
Do not allow sediments and other materials to be tracked from the site by vehicle traffic.
Stabilize construction entrance roadways to inhibit sediments from being deposited onto
public ways. Immediately sweep up accidental depositions. Do not allow depositions to
be washed away by rain or by any other means.
G.
Contain non-stormwater runoff from equipment or vehicle washing and any other activity
at the work site.
H.
At completion of the Work, clear the worksite of debris and restore to a condition at least
equal to or better than prior to construction.
I.
When working in live streams, these are additional water pollution control requirements.
1.
Erect barriers sufficient to prevent muddying or polluting streams.
STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURES
010600 - 2
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
2.
Prior to removing materials from a flowing stream, use a stream bypass or other
equivalent means to keep the flow in the stream free of the mud or silt from the
removal operations.
3.
Avoid transporting materials across live streams. If not possible, the
transportation operation must be designed to prevent materials from falling into
the stream and cannot muddy the stream.
Equipment may not be operated in a live stream or channel unless the Contractor
can demonstrate to the Engineer’s satisfaction that no other practical alternatives
exist. The equipment must be designed to prevent materials from falling into the
stream and cannot muddy the stream.
4.
5.
Do not allow fresh portland cement or fresh portland cement concrete to enter
the water flowing in streams, channels or drains.
6.
Do not allow material derived from the Work to be deposited in a live stream,
channel or drain.
3.1 Maintenance
A.
To ensure the proper implementation and functioning of control measures, the Contractor
shall regularly inspect and maintain the construction site. The Contractor shall identify
corrective actions and time needed to address any deficient measures or reinitiate any
measures that have been discontinued. Inspections of the construction site shall be
conducted by the Contractor to identify deficient measures, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Prior to a forecast storm;
At 24-hour intervals during extended precipitation events;
After all precipitation, which causes runoff capable of carrying sediment from the
construction site; and;
Routinely, at a minimum of once every week during the rainy season (October 1st
– April 30th) and once every month during non-rainy season (May 1st –
September 30th).
All temporary and/or permanent post-construction control measures shall be maintained
and regularly inspected by the Contractor after all improvements are in place and
accepted by the Owner. Temporary and/or permanent post-construction landscaping
maintenance shall include but not limited to, watering, seeding, hydro-seeding, matting,
slope stabilization, re-vegetation, and any other maintenance control measures
recommended by the Owner to insure proper erosion control and plant growth.
END OF SECTION 010600
STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURES
010600 - 3
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
SECTION 014200 - TESTING AND INSPECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Testing and inspection services to meet requirements of the 2013 California Building
Code (CBC), Title 24, Parts 1 and 2, as indicated on the Drawings.
B.
One or more certified inspectors employed by the OWNER in accordance with the
requirements of California Building Standards Administrative Code will be assigned to the
Work with their duties as specifically defined in Section 4-333(b).
C.
Tests of materials are required by a certified testing agency as set forth in Section 4-335
of the California Building Standards Administrative Code.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not applicable)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
TESTS
A.
OWNER will select an independent testing agency to conduct tests, sampling, and testing
of materials. Selection of material to be tested shall be by the agency and not by
CONTRACTOR.
B.
Any material shipped from the source of supply prior to having satisfactorily passed such
testing and inspection or prior to the receipt of notice from IOR such testing and
inspection is not required shall not be incorporated into the Work.
C.
OWNER will select and directly reimburse testing agency the costs for all required tests
and inspections, but may be reimbursed by CONTRACTOR for such costs as noted in
related sections of the Contract Documents.
D.
The independent testing agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter, or enlarge
requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work.
The agency shall not perform any duties of CONTRACTOR.
E.
CONTRACTOR shall provide an insulated curing box for concrete cylinders and will
relocate said box and cylinders as rapidly as required in order to provide for progress of
the Work.
TEST REPORTS
A.
Test reports shall include all tests performed, regardless of whether such tests indicate
the material is satisfactory or unsatisfactory. Samples taken but not tested shall also be
reported. Records of special sampling operations as required shall also be reported.
Reports shall indicate the material or materials were sampled and tested in accordance
with requirements of CBC, Title 24, Parts 1 and 2, as indicated on the Drawings. Test
reports shall indicate specified design strength. They shall also definitely state whether
or not material or materials tested comply with the specified requirements.
TESTING AND INSPECTION
014200 - 1
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
3.03
VERIFICATION OF TEST REPORTS
A.
3.04
3.05
3.06
gkkworks
Each testing agency shall submit to the Division of the State Architect, Architect, and
Construction Manager, a verified report in duplicate covering tests which are required to
be performed by that agency during progress of the Work. Such report shall be furnished
each time construction on the Work is suspended, covering tests up to that time, and
prior to Final Completion of the Work, covering all tests.
INSPECTION BY OWNER
A.
OWNER and its representatives shall at all times have access, for purpose of inspection,
to all parts of the Work and to shops wherein the Work is in preparation, and
CONTRACTOR shall at all times maintain proper facilities and provide safe access for
such inspection.
B.
OWNER shall have the right to reject materials and/or workmanship deemed defective
Work, and to require correction. Defective workmanship shall be corrected in a
satisfactory manner and defective materials shall be removed from the premises and
legally disposed of, all without charge to OWNER. If CONTRACTOR does not correct
such defective Work within a reasonable time, fixed by written notice and in accordance
with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, OWNER may correct such
defective Work and proceed in accordance with related Articles of the Contract
Documents.
C.
CONTRACTOR is responsible for compliance to all applicable local, state, and federal
regulations regarding codes, regulations, ordinances, restrictions, and requirements.
INSPECTOR OF RECORD
A.
Inspector of Record is employed by OWNER in accordance with requirements of Title 24
of the California Code of Regulations with their duties specifically defined therein.
B.
Inspection of Work shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from any obligation to fulfill all of the
terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
C.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for scheduling times of inspection, tests, sample
taking, and similar activities of the Work.
TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A.
Tests and inspections do not limit inspection of the Work but are required by Code, other
agencies, or are required in related Sections of the Contract Documents.
B.
Excavations, Foundations and Retaining Walls - CBC, Chapter 18A.
C.
Concrete – CBC, Chapter 19A.
D.
Masonry - CBC, Chapter 21A.
E.
Steel - CBC, Chapters 17A & 22A.
F.
Site work, Demolition & Construction, Chapters 18A.
END OF SECTION
TESTING AND INSPECTION
014200 - 2
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
SECTION 014300 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
B.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities
are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those
Sections may also cover production of standard products.
Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other qualityassurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and control services required
by Architect, Owner, Construction Manager, or authorities having jurisdiction are not
limited by provisions of this Section.
Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction
disturbed by testing and inspecting activities.
Divisions 2 through 32 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B.
Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements.
Services do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Architect or Construction Manager.
C.
Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to
verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing,
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014300 - 1
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
or operation; they are not Samples. Accepted mockups establish the standard by which the
Work will be judged.
D.
Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to
verify performance characteristics.
E.
Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project
before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or
compliance with specified criteria.
F.
Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by a District approved testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.
G.
Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e.,
plant, mill, factory, or shop.
H.
Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation
of the Work and for completed Work.
I.
Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
J.
Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
K.
Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a
minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with
special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.4
CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish
different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the
MOST STRINGENT requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but
apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
1.
B.
The contractor shall also assume the HIGHEST COST in the Bid for conflicting
requirements.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision
before proceeding.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014300 - 2
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
1.5
gkkworks
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on
the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
D.
1.6
Specification Section number and title.
Description of test and inspection.
Identification of applicable standards.
Identification of test and inspection methods.
Number of tests and inspections required.
Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
Requirements for obtaining samples.
Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
Date of issue.
Project title and number.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
Complete test or inspection data.
Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014300 - 3
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
C.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
E.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.
F.
Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities
shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall
satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1.
G.
Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing
the Work.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the
experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according
to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1.
2.
NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program.
H.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
I.
Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing
for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the
following:
1.
Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.
Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory
mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with
performance requirements.
Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will
perform same tasks for Project.
Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods
of construction indicated for the completed Work.
When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and
laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014300 - 4
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
2.
J.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.7
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection,
and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, through Construction Manager, with
copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether
tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1.
K.
gkkworks
Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect or Construction Manager.
Notify Architect and Construction Manager seven days in advance of dates and times
when mockups will be constructed.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain Architect's and Construction Manager's approval of mockups before starting work,
fabrication, or construction.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified
in individual Sections in Divisions 2 through 16.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged
to perform.
Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as
authorized by Change Orders.
Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the
Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities
having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having
jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
1.
Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality-control services.
a.
2.
3.
Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.
Notify testing agencies at least 72 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014300 - 5
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
4.
5.
gkkworks
Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Services:
Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal
Procedures."
D.
Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
E.
Testing Agency Responsibilities:
Cooperate with Architect, Construction Manager, and
Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and
inspections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
G.
Notify Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or
deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar qualitycontrol service through Contractor.
Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
Access to the Work.
Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1.
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014300 - 6
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
H.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar
quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of
date established for commencement of the Work.
1.
1.8
gkkworks
Distribution: Distribute schedule to Construction Manager, testing agencies, and each
party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are
required.
SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A.
Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency and required
special inspector(s) to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having
jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures
and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
Notifying Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and
deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service to Architect, through Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor and to
authorities having jurisdiction.
Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which
includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
Submit Final Verified Report at completion of accepted work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A.
Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Date test or inspection was conducted.
Description of the Work tested or inspected.
Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to
test and inspection log for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal
working hours.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014300 - 7
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
3.2
gkkworks
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.
General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1.
2.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining
areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and
Patching."
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 014300
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014300 - 8
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
SECTION 0165000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for
use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout.
Divisions 2 through 32 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and
installations specified to be warranted.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1.
2.
3.
Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
products.
Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities
related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties,
appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B.
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
C.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and
accompanied by the words "basis of design," to establish the significant qualities related to type,
function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other
characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 1
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
1.4
gkkworks
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names
of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each
product.
1.
2.
Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals
Schedule.
Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
3.
Initial Submittal: Within 10 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3
copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for
variations from Contract requirements.
a.
4.
5.
B.
Specification Section number and title.
Generic name used in the Contract Documents.
Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations.
Manufacturer's name and address.
Supplier's name and address.
Installer's name and address.
Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period.
Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery
date.
At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and
designations that must be established early in Contract period.
Completed List: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3
copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and
for variations from Contract requirements.
Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 14 days of receipt
of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product
selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack
of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract
Documents.
Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.
Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified.
Significant qualities may include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and
requirements indicated.
Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 2
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
2.
Architect's Action:
If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request.
Architect will notify Contractor, through Construction Manager, of approval or rejection of
proposed comparable product request within 14 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of
receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a.
b.
1.5
Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify
product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section
number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
D.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.
Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce
indicated results.
Architect's Action:
If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor, through Construction Manager, of acceptance or rejection
of proposed substitution within 14 days of receipt of request.
a.
C.
gkkworks
Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures."
Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable
product request within time allocated.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1
Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously
selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 3
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
1.
2.
1.6
gkkworks
Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods
compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.
If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible
products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Delivery and Handling:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Storage:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.7
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms.
Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and
equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1.
2.
Manufacturer's Warranty:
Preprinted written warranty published by individual
manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to
Owner.
Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract
Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide
more rights for Owner.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 4
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
B.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1.
2.
3.
C.
gkkworks
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using appropriate form properly executed.
Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A.
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is
Architect's.
Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish "salient characteristics" of products.
Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or
equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2
"Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
Product Selection Procedures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the
named product that complies with requirements.
Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,
provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
Products:
Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and
manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.
Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a
product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.
Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and
manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies
with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed product.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 5
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
6.
7.
8.
9.
Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a
product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies
with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed product.
Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional
requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the
specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions"
Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.
Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of
manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other
named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions,
and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions
in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the
other named manufacturers.
Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established
Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's
sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
a.
10.
If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions"
Article for proposal of product.
Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected
from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that
complies with other specified requirements.
a.
2.2
gkkworks
Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors,
patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or
texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium
items.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 10 days prior to Bid
Opening. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of
Architect.
B.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return
requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner
must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect
for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and
similar considerations.
Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 6
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.3
gkkworks
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has
been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible
with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will
return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 016000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 7
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Construction layout.
Field engineering and surveying.
General installation of products.
Coordination of Owner-installed products.
Progress cleaning.
Starting and adjusting.
Protection of installed construction.
Correction of the Work.
Division 01 Section "Construction Surveying" for procedures for coordinating field
engineering with other construction activities.
Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and
patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and
levels, and final cleaning.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor or professional engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
017300 - 1
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction
affecting the Work.
1.
B.
Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction
indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the
existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.
1.
2.
C.
Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical
services.
Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities
serving Project site.
Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or
Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1.
Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of
the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.2
Description of the Work.
List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
Recommended corrections.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Construction Manager that is necessary to
adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C.
Space Requirements:
Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
017300 - 2
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
D.
3.3
gkkworks
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Construction
Manager and Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A.
Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify Construction Manager and Architect promptly.
B.
General: Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted
surveying practices.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
Notify Architect and Construction Manager when deviations from required lines and levels
exceed allowable tolerances.
Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established
by authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
D.
Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E.
Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name
and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
available for reference by Architect and Construction Manager.
3.4
FIELD ENGINEERING
A.
Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.
B.
Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
points during construction operations.
1.
Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written
approval of Architect or Construction Manager. Report lost or destroyed permanent
benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent
benchmarks or control points to Architect and Construction Manager before proceeding.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
017300 - 3
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
2.
C.
gkkworks
Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base
replacements on the original survey control points.
Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1.
2.
3.
Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide
temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed.
Restore marked
construction to its original condition.
D.
Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work
requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations,
angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.
E.
Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real
property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor or
professional engineer, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately
positioned as shown on the survey.
1.
2.
3.5
Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing
improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours,
and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.
Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with
authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 9 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C.
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E.
Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
017300 - 4
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
F.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
G.
Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component
securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
1.
2.
3.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
Coordinate installation of anchorages.
Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
H.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
I.
Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.6
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate
progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1.
2.
3.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
B.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1.
2.
Remove liquid spills promptly.
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
D.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed
surfaces.
E.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
017300 - 5
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
F.
Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to
ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G.
Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing
waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
H.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J.
Limiting Exposures:
Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.7
STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation.
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B.
Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper
operation.
C.
Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to
inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification
requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
3.8
Remove
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.9
CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A.
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and
finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
1.
B.
Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up
with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
017300 - 6
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
C.
Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.
D.
Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired.
E.
Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION 017300
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
017300 - 7
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
SECTION 017301 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B.
See Divisions 2 through 32 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10days
before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include
the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate
why they cannot be avoided.
Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's
appearance and other significant visual elements.
Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work.
Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting
and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated
and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will
be disrupted.
Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to
structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of
reinforcement with original structure.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change
their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
B.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
C.
Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components
in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity
to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or
safety.
D.
Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or
CUTTING AND PATCHING
017301 - 1
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a
visually unsatisfactory manner.
1.4
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to
void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B.
In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when
installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to
be performed.
1.
2.
3.2
Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,
including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.
Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B.
Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C.
Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage
to adjoining areas.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
017301 - 2
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
D.
3.3
gkkworks
Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems
are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before
cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.
PERFORMANCE
A.
General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1.
B.
Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size
required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover
openings when not in use.
Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections
where required by cutting and patching operations.
Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate integrity of installation.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of
patching and refinishing.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an evenplane surface of uniform appearance.
Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
017301 - 3
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
D.
gkkworks
Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely
remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
END OF SECTION 017301
CUTTING AND PATCHING
017301 - 4
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Inspection procedures.
Warranties.
Final cleaning.
Division 1 Section "General Conditions" for requirements for Applications for Payment for
Substantial and Final Completion.
Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site.
Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications, and Record Product Data.
Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
Divisions 2 through 32 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements
for the Work in those Sections.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on
the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,
Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property
surveys, and similar final record information.
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 1
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
B.
Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner.
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
Complete startup testing of systems.
Submit test/adjust/balance records.
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along
construction tools, and similar elements.
Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use,
maintenance.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to
defects.
Advise Owner's
with mockups,
operation, and
eliminate visual
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify
Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial
Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or
additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate
will be issued.
1.
2.
1.4
gkkworks
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.
FINAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion, complete the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "General
Conditions."
Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy
of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training videotapes.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or
will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will
be issued.
1.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 2
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
1.5
gkkworks
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A.
Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and
area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction
including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of
construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A.
1.
2.
3.
Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and
proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.
Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
Include the following information at the top of each page:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
1.6
Project name.
Date.
Name of Architect and Construction Manager.
Name of Contractor.
Page number.
WARRANTIES
A.
Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the
Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated.
B.
Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of
designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during
construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
paper.
Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"
Project name, and name of Contractor.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 3
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and
other foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials.
Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 4
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
1)
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
gkkworks
Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and
electrical nameplates.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
with requirements for new fixtures.
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C.
Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid
Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.
D.
Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or
excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous
materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of
lawfully.
END OF SECTION 017700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 5
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
SECTION 017801 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record
Documents, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Record Drawings.
Record Specifications.
Record Product Data.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.
Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
Divisions 2 through 32 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents
of the Work in those Sections.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1.
Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints.
1)
Electronic Media: CD-R.
B.
Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications.
C.
Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.
1.
Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,
submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record
Product Data.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017801 - 1
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Record Prints: Maintain one set of black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings.
1.
Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the
marked-up Record Prints.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
Dimensional changes to Drawings.
Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
Depths of foundations below first floor.
Locations and depths of underground utilities.
Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
Revisions to electrical circuitry.
Actual equipment locations.
Duct size and routing.
Locations of concealed internal utilities.
Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
Changes made following District’s and/or Architect's written orders.
Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
Mark the Contract Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical
conditions, completely and accurately.
Mark record sets with revisions in red. Use other colors to distinguish between changes
for different categories of the Work at same location.
Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
Record Transparencies:
Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial
Completion, review marked-up Record Prints with Architect and Construction Manager. When
authorized, prepare a full set of corrected transparencies of the Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings.
1.
2.
Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints.
Erase, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect through Construction Manager for resolution.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017801 - 2
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
3.
4.
C.
Owner will furnish Contractor one set of transparencies of the Contract Drawings for use
in recording information.
Print the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings for use as Record Transparencies.
Architect will make the Contract Drawings available to Contractor's print shop.
Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1.
2.
2.2
gkkworks
Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification
on cover sheets.
Record Transparencies: Organize into unbound sets matching Record Prints. Place
transparencies in durable tube-type drawing containers with end caps. Mark end cap of
each container with identification. If container does not include a complete set, identify
Drawings included.
RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A.
Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in
operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.
Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where
applicable.
RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A.
Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where
applicable.
MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A.
Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017801 - 3
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A.
Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project
Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as
they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.
1. Construction Manager to review on a regular basis.
B.
Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in
the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project
Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and
in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to
Project Record Documents for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal
working hours.
END OF SECTION 017801
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017801 - 4
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
SECTION 017802 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
Emergency manuals.
Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes,
systems and equipment.
Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for
operation and maintenance manuals.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance
manuals.
Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for
operation and maintenance manuals.
Divisions 2 through 32 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual
requirements for the Work in those Sections.
DEFINITIONS
A.
System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular
interaction.
B.
Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit three copies of each manual in final form at least 14 days before final inspection.
Architect will return copy with comments within 14 days after final inspection.
1.
Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit three
copies of each corrected manual within 14 days of receipt of Architect's comments.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017802 - 1
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
1.5
gkkworks
COORDINATION
A.
Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more
than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information
furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY
A.
Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
List of documents.
List of systems.
List of equipment.
Table of contents.
B.
List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation
and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
C.
List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For
pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
D.
Tables of Contents:
maintenance manual.
E.
Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual,
identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the
Contract Documents.
If no designation exists, assign a designation according to
ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building
Systems."
2.2
Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and
MANUALS, GENERAL
A.
Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for
each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a
system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Title page.
Table of contents.
Manual contents.
Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Subject matter included in manual.
Name and address of Project.
Name and address of Owner.
Date of submittal.
Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.
Name and address of Architect.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017802 - 2
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
7.
C.
Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to
the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
1.
D.
If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to
accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each
volume of the set.
Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
1.
Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on
spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded
oversize sheets.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize
data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Crossreference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper
operation or maintenance of equipment or system.
Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents.
Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each
tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of
equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification
Section number and title of Project Manual.
Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.
Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.
Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a.
b.
2.3
gkkworks
If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.
If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,
and drawing locations.
EMERGENCY MANUALS
A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1.
2.
3.
Type of emergency.
Emergency instructions.
Emergency procedures.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017802 - 3
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
B.
gkkworks
Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Fire.
Flood.
Gas leak.
Water leak.
Power failure.
Water outage.
System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
Chemical release or spill.
C.
Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,
and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for
notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
D.
Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
Instructions on stopping.
Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
OPERATION MANUALS
A.
Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
Operating standards.
Operating procedures.
Operating logs.
Wiring diagrams.
Control diagrams.
Piped system diagrams.
Precautions against improper use.
License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
Descriptions: Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Product name and model number.
Manufacturer's name.
Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
Equipment function.
Operating characteristics.
Limiting conditions.
Performance curves.
Engineering data and tests.
Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017802 - 4
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
C.
gkkworks
Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Startup procedures.
Equipment or system break-in procedures.
Routine and normal operating instructions.
Regulation and control procedures.
Instructions on stopping.
Normal shutdown instructions.
Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
D.
Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls
as installed.
E.
Piped Systems:
identification.
2.5
Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and
sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C.
Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Product name and model number.
Manufacturer's name.
Color, pattern, and texture.
Material and chemical composition.
Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Inspection procedures.
Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
Repair instructions.
E.
Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
F.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1.
Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017802 - 5
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
2.6
gkkworks
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A.
Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance
service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each
product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance
service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C.
Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation
including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Maintenance Procedures:
maintenance procedures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins.
Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly
and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
Include the following information and items that detail essential
Test and inspection instructions.
Troubleshooting guide.
Precautions against improper maintenance.
Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
Demonstration and training videotape, if available.
Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
1.
2.
Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,
quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
Maintenance and Service Record:
Include manufacturers' forms for recording
maintenance.
F.
Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G.
Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
H.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1.
Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017802 - 6
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MANUAL PREPARATION
A.
Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that
provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
B.
Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures
for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.
C.
Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
1.
2.
E.
Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
1.
F.
Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and
where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment
or systems.
Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence
and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings
to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1.
2.
G.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information
for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an
instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section
"Project Record Documents."
Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and
maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION 017802
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017802 - 7
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
Section 010100 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-occupancy
requirements, and phasing requirements.
Section 017300 "Execution Requirements".
Section 017301 “Cutting and Patching” for cutting and patching procedures.
Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above-grade and belowgrade improvements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent
damage, and deliver to Owner.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall
where indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and
that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and
reinstalled.
1.4
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119 - 1
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
1.5
gkkworks
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.6
Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,
demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed
by selective demolition operations.
Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.
B.
Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures
proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control
and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.
C.
Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1.
2.
3.
Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending
dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.
Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
D.
Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.
E.
Warranties: Documentation indicated that existing warranties are still in effect after completion
of selective demolition.
1.7
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.
B.
Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility
licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
1.8
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far
as practical.
B.
Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.
C.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119 - 2
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
1.
2.
gkkworks
Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify
Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate
contract.
D.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
E.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
damage during selective demolition operations.
1.
Maintain fire-protection services and routes during selective demolition operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning
selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition
operations.
B.
Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not
guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.
C.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
D.
When unanticipated elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered,
investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to
Architect.
E.
Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings and
preconstruction photographs.
3.2
UTILITY SERVICES AND SYSTEMS
A.
Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and
protect them against damage.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119 - 3
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
B.
Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,
disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems
serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1.
2.
3.
3.3
gkkworks
Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.
Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain
continuity of services/systems to other parts of the site.
PREPARATION
A.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
B.
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1.
C.
3.4
Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area
and to and from occupied portions of building.
Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required
to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes
to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction
being demolished.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A.
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
B.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.5
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A.
Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at
least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at
perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of
concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119 - 4
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
B.
Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain
and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.
C.
Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,
using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
D.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and
remove.
3.6
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
General: Remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an
EPA-approved landfill.
1.
2.
3.
3.7
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION 024119
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119 - 5
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
SECTION 099113 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior
items and surfaces.
1.
B.
Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material
is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned,
paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish
is not indicated, the District’s Representative will select from standard colors and finishes
available.
1.
C.
1.2
General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
2.
3.
4.
A.
Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
DEFINITIONS
1.
1.3
Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including
color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and
electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish.
Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts,
and labels.
1.
A.
Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to
shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at
an 85-degree meter.
Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at
a 60-degree meter.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Reference data to the District’s painting systems.
statement that components are appropriate to each painting system.
Include manufacturer's
PAINTING
099113-1
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
1.
2.
B.
.Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and
cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by
manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis
and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.
Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate
actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.
1.
2.
3.
Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and
primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until
required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each
Sample for location and application.
Submit Samples on the following substrates for District’s Representative's review of color
and texture only:
a.
C.
gkkworks
Color Samples: 8-1/2 by 11 inch card of each color for approval prior to
commencing work. Samples shall be for color approval only, not texture or finish.
Submit in sufficient time to avoid delaying progress of work.
Qualification Data: For Applicator.
1.4
STANDARD OF QUALITY: The products specified and manufactured are to conform to the
Paint Specifications when indicated, and shall be considered as the minimum acceptable
standard of quality.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All painting and coating materials shall meet or exceed the EPA and/or California State
environmental regulations, which ever is more restrictive, for the maximum allowable amount
VOC content.
B.
Statement of Application: Upon completion, submit written statement signed by the Contractor,
his applicator and the manufacturer, stating that painting systems complied with the
specifications, and the application methods complied with manufacturer's printed instructions
and were proper and adequate for conditions of application and performance.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same
manufacturer as the finish coats.
D.
Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each type of
coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate
finish of approved sample Submittals.
1.
District’s Representative will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and
conditions for application of each type of coating and substrate.
a.
Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 40 sq. ft..
PAINTING
099113-2
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
b.
2.
1.6
A.
After finishes are accepted, District’s Representative will use the room or surface
to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature.
Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Small Areas and Items: District’s Representative will designate items or areas
required.
Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after
permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide
required sheen, color, and texture on each surface.
a.
3.
gkkworks
Product name or title of material.
Product description (generic classification or binder type).
Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
Thinning instructions.
Application instructions.
Color name and number.
VOC content.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
1.
1.7
Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
are between 50 and 90 deg F.
B.
Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air are between 45 and 95 deg F.
C.
Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or
to damp or wet surfaces.
1.
Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
PAINTING
099113-3
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
1.8
A.
gkkworks
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the
quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with
labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to District.
1.
Quantity: Furnish District with extra paint materials in quantities indicated below:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Exterior, Flat Acrylic Paint: 1 gal of each color applied.
Exterior, Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: 1 gal of each color applied.
Exterior, Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: 1 gal of each color applied.
Interior, Flat Acrylic Paint: 1 gal of each color applied.
Interior, Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: 1 gal of each color applied.
Interior, Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: 1 gal of each color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other
Part 2 articles.
1.
Frazee Paint Company (Frazee).
a.
Basis-of-Design
2.2
PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are
compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B.
Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's premium-quality paint material of the various coating
types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application
indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not
be acceptable.
1.
C.
Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors
or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the
exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material
data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
Colors: Match Architect’s samples.
PAINTING
099113-4
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for paint application.
1.
2.
B.
Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1.
3.2
A.
General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical
or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before
surface preparation and painting.
After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
workers skilled in the trades involved.
Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances
that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
1.
C.
Notify District’s Representative about anticipated problems when using the materials
specified over substrates primed by others.
PREPARATION
1.
B.
Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within a particular area.
Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning
process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's
written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1.
2.
Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and
mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence,
chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze.
If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of
surface preparation.
a.
b.
Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.
Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate
tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and
burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture
content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
PAINTING
099113-5
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
c.
d.
3.
c.
D.
2.
3.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so
surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized
sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written
Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface
film and strain material before using.
Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple
coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but
provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
3.3
A.
Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer.
Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash
coat before priming.
Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged.
Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch
up with same primer as the shop coat.
Material Preparation:
instructions.
1.
E.
Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or
other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize
with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting.
Concrete shall be dry before any sealer or paint is applied. Determine substrate
moisture content with appropriate moisture meter.
Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop
coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use
solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations.
a.
b.
4.
gkkworks
APPLICATION
General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules.
Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,
grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in
place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and
provide desired protection.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
PAINTING
099113-6
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through
registers or grilles.
Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.
Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match
exterior.
Sand lightly between each succeeding coat.
Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent
surface deterioration.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
gkkworks
The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application
method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended
by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to
manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.
Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
Two finish coats over a primer are specified. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions
show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish,
color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices,
welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat
surfaces.
Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat
surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky
under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not
cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate
size for surface or item being painted.
Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
D.
Minimum Coating Thickness:
Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film
thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items
exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.
F.
Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Uninsulated metal piping.
Uninsulated plastic piping.
Pipe hangers and supports.
Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and
outlets.
PAINTING
099113-7
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
6.
7.
G.
gkkworks
Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable jacket
material.
Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
Switchgear.
Panelboards.
Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
H.
Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime
coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other
defects due to insufficient sealing.
I.
Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,
opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be
acceptable.
J.
Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish,
or repaint work not complying with requirements.
3.4
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
District reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as
District deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied:
1.
3.5
A.
District may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used
does not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying
paint from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the
noncomplying paint. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove noncomplying
paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the two
coatings are incompatible.
CLEANING
Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded
paint materials from Project site.
1.
After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished
surfaces.
PAINTING
099113-8
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
3.6
gkkworks
PROTECTION
A.
Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by District’s
Representative.
B.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.
1.
3.7
A.
After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not
required on shop-primed items.
1.
Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer.
Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer.
a. Frazee 661F774 Rust Preventive Alkyd Metal Primer @ 3 mils DFT
Finish Coats: a. Frazee 215 Royal Supreme 100% Acrylic Low Luster @ 1.6 mils DFT
per coat
B.
C.
Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over properly prepared exterior zinccoated metal surfaces. Use Chemco Metal Enhancer to degrease and prepare zinc-coated
metal prior to priming:
1.
Low-Luster Finish Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer.
Primer:
a. Frazee 661F774 Rust Preventive Alkyd Metal Primer @ 3 mils DFT
Finish Coats:
a. Frazee 215 Royal Supreme 100% Acrylic Low Luster @ 1.6 mils DFT
per coat
Aluminum: Provide the following finish systems over properly prepared exterior aluminum
surfaces. Use Chemco Metal Enhancer to degrease and prepare aluminum prior to priming::
1.
Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
Primer:
a. Frazee 661F774 Rust Preventive Alkyd Metal Primer @ 3 mils DFT
Finish Coats: a. Frazee 124 Mirroglide 100% Acrylic Semigloss Enamel @ 1.4 mils DFT
per coat
PAINTING
099113-9
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
3.8
A.
gkkworks
INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces:
1.
Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats finish coats over a primer.
Primer:
a. Frazee 061 Aquaseal Wall Sealer @ 1.3 mils DFT
Finish Coats: a. Frazee 022 LoGlo Acrylic Eggshell Enamel @ 1.6 mils DFT per coat
B.
Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:
1.
Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
Primer:
a. Frazee 561 Acrylic Metal Prime @ 1.8 mils DFT
Finish Coats: a. Frazee 011 Velvin Acrylic Copolymer Flat @ 1.6 mils DFT per coat
2.
Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
Primer:
a. Frazee 561 Acrylic Metal Prime @ 1.8 mils DFT
Finish Coats: a. Frazee 126 Mirroglide 100% Acrylic Low Sheen Enamel @ 1.8 mils
DFT per coat
3.
Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
Primer:
a. Frazee 561 Acrylic Metal Prime @ 1.8 mils DFT
Finish Coats: a. Frazee 124 Mirroglide 100% Acrylic Semigloss Enamel @ 1.4 mils DFT
per coat
END OF SECTION 099113
PAINTING
099113-10
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
SECTION 104310 – SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
1.2
Panel signs.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.3
ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance
Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines."
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.
1.
2.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range of color,
texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated:
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by
others, and accessories.
Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and
Braille, and layout for each sign.
Acrylic Sheet: 8 by 10 inches for each color required.
Panel Signs: Not less than 12 inches square including border.
6-inch long sections of each profile.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance.
B.
Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single
manufacturer.
C.
Regulatory Requirements:
Guidelines.
Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility
SIGNAGE
104310 - 1
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
D.
gkkworks
Signage and Graphics:
1.
Tactile character type: Tactile characters on signs shall be raised 1/32” inch (0.794 mm)
minimum and shall be sans serif uppercase characters accompanied by Contracted
Grade 2 Braille (See note below). 2013 CBC.
2.
Tactile character size: Raised characters shall be a minimum of 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) and
a maximum of 2 inches (51 mm) high. 2013 CBC.
3.
Finish and contrast: Contrast between character, symbols and their background must be
70% minimum and have a non-glare finish. 2013 CBC.
4.
Proportions, 2013 CBC:
a. Characters on signs shall have a width-to-height ratio of between 3:5 and
1:1 and a stroke width-to-height ratio of between 1:5 and 1:10.
b. All letters measured must be uppercase. After choosing a typestyle to
test, begin by printing the letters, I, X, and O at 1 inch high. Place the
template’s 1:1 square over the X or O, whichever is narrower. If the
character is not wider than 1 inch, nor narrower than the 3:5 rectangle,
the proportions are correct. Use the 1:5 rectangle to determine if the
stroke of the I is too broad, and the 1:10 rectangle to see if it is too
narrow. If all the tests are passed, the typestyle is compliant with
proportion requirement..
5.
Braille, 2013 CBC:
a. California (Contracted) Grade 2 Braille shall be used wherever Braille is
required in other portions of these standards.
b. Dots shall be 1/10 inch (2.54 mm) on center in each cell with 2/10 inch
(5.08 mm) space between cells, measured from the second column of
dots in the first cell to the first column of dots in the second cell.
c.
6.
1.5
Dots shall be raised a minimum of 1/40 inch (0.635 mm) above the
background. Braille dots shall be domed or rounded.
Mounting location shall be determined so that a person may approach within 3 inches (76
mm) of signage without encountering protruding objects or standing within the swing of
the door. 2013 CBC.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.6
Field Measurements: Verify recess openings by field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs.
SIGNAGE
104310 - 2
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
2.2
Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing).
PANEL SIGNS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
B.
ASI-Modulex, Inc.
Or District approved equal.
Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under
installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from
corner to corner, complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Acrylic Sheet: 0.060 inch thick.
Edge Condition: Beveled.
Corner Condition: Rounded to radius indicated.
Mounting: Unframed.
a.
b.
5.
6.
Wall mounted with two-face tape.
Manufacturer's standard anchors for substrates encountered.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch above surface with
contrasting colors.
C.
Brackets: Fabricate brackets and fittings for bracket-mounted signs from extruded aluminum to
suit panel sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. Factory paint brackets in color
matching background color of panel sign.
D.
Tactile and Braille Sign: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and symbols
complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be
accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut edges
free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or rounded shape.
1.
2.
Panel Material: Opaque acrylic sheet.
Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch.
E.
Subsurface Engraved Acrylic Sheet: Reverse-engrave back face of clear acrylic sheet. Fill
resulting copy with enamel. Apply opaque background color coating over enamel-filled copy.
F.
Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy background colors, provide colored coatings,
including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum
adherence to acrylic surface and are UV and water resistant for five years for application
intended.
SIGNAGE
104310 - 3
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
1.
2.3
gkkworks
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
ACCESSORIES
A.
2.4
Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for
exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or
lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set
into concrete or masonry work.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.5
Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop
welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of
exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress exposed and
contact surfaces.
Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water
penetration.
Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs only as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
installation, in location not exposed to view after final assembly.
Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be
inconspicuous.
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
SIGNAGE
104310 - 4
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B.
Verify that items are sized and located to accommodate signs.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and
complying with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
B.
Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more
stringent requirements apply.
1.
2.
3.3
Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion
and other defects in appearance.
Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where
not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls.
Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects
or standing within swing of door.
Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method
for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.
Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner.
END OF SECTION 104310
SIGNAGE
104310 - 5
SECTION 26 01 00
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
ARTICLE 1
SUMMARY
1.1
This Division of the specification outlines the provisions of the contract work to be
performed under this Division.
1.2
This Section applies to and forms a part of each section of specifications in Division 26
and all work performed under the electrical and communications contracts.
1.3
In addition, work in this Division is governed by the provisions of the bidding
requirements, contract forms, general conditions and all sections under general
requirements.
1.4
These specifications contain statements which may be more definitive or more restrictive
than those contained in the General Conditions. Where these statements occur, they
shall take precedence over the General Conditions.
1.5
Where the words 'provide' or 'provision' are used, it shall be definitely interpreted as
'furnishing and installing complete in operating condition'. Where the words 'as indicated'
or 'as shown' are used, it shall mean as shown on contract drawings.
1.6
Where items are specified in the singular, this Division shall provide the quantity as
shown on drawings plus any spares or extras mentioned on drawings or specifications.
All specified and supplied equipment shall be new.
ARTICLE 2
2.1
ARTICLE 3
CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
The Contractor shall have a current California C-10 Electrical Contractor’s license and all
individuals working on this project shall have passed the Department of Industrial
Relations Division of apprenticeship Standards – “Electrician Certification Program.”
CODES, PERMITS AND FEES
3.1
Comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, codes, or rulings of
governmental units having jurisdiction as well as standards of NFPA, and serving utility
requirements.
3.2
Obtain permits, fees, inspections, meter and the like, associated with work in each
section of this Division.
3.3
Installation procedures, methods and conditions shall comply with the latest requirements
of the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
ARTICLE 4
4.1
EXAMINATION OF PREMISES
Examine the construction drawings and premises prior to bidding. No allowances will be
made for not being knowledgeable of existing conditions.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
26 01 00-1
ARTICLE 5
5.1
STANDARDS
The following standard publications of the latest editions enforced and supplements
thereto shall form a part of these specifications. All electrical work must, as a minimum,
be in accordance with these standards.
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.1.5
5.1.6
5.1.7
5.1.8
5.1.9
5.1.10
5.1.11
5.1.12
5.1.13
5.1.14
5.1.15
5.1.16
5.1.17
ARTICLE 6
2013 California Electrical Code (CEC), Part 3 Title 24 CCR.
National Fire Protection Association.
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
Certified Ballast Manufacturers' Association (CBM).
National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA).
Institution of Electrical & Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
American Society for Testing & Materials (ASTM).
National Board of Fire Underwriters (NBFU).
National Board of Standards (NBS).
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPECS).
Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL).
National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).
2013 California Building Code (CBC), Part 2, Title 24 CCR.
2013 California Fire Code (CFC), Part 9, Title 24, CCR.
2013 NFPA 72 with California State Amendments
National Electrical Testing Association (NETA), 2010 or most current
DEFINITIONS
6.1
Concealed: Hidden from sight, as in trenches, chases, hollow construction, or above
furred spaces, hung ceilings - acoustical or plastic type, or exposed to view only in
tunnels, attics, shafts, crawl spaces, unfinished spaces, or other areas solely for
maintenance and repair.
6.2
Exposed, Non-Concealed, Unfinished Space: A room or space that is ordinarily
accessible only to building maintenance personnel, a room noted on the 'finish schedule'
with exposed and unpainted construction for walls, floors, or ceilings or specifically
mentioned as 'unfinished'.
6.3
Finish Space: Any space ordinarily visible, including exterior areas.
ARTICLE 7
WORK AND MATERIALS
7.1
Unless otherwise specified, all materials must be new and of the best quality. Materials
previously incorporated into other projects, salvaged, or refurbished are not considered
new. Perform all labor in a thorough and workmanlike manner.
7.2
All materials provided under the contract must bear the UL label where normally
available. Note that this requirement may be repeated under equipment specifications.
In general, such devices as will void the label should be provided in separate enclosures
and wired to the labeled unit in proper manner.
ARTICLE 8
8.1
SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings and all data in accordance with Division 1 of these specifications
and as noted below for all equipment provided under this Division.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
26 01 00-2
8.2
Shop drawings submittals demonstrate to the Architect that the Contractor understands
the design concept. The Contractor demonstrates his understanding by indicating which
equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication
and installation methods of material and equipment he intends to use. If deviations,
discrepancies, or conflicts between submittals and specifications are discovered either
prior to or after submittals are processed, notify the Architect immediately.
8.3
Manufacturer’s data and dimension sheets shall be submitted giving all pertinent physical
and engineering data including weights, cross sections and maintenance instructions.
Standard items of equipment such as receptacles, switches, plates, etc., which are
cataloged items, shall be listed by manufacturer.
8.4
Index all submittals and reference them to these specifications. All submittal items shall
be assembled and submitted, one for each specification section. (Multiple specification
sections may be grouped together in one common submittal binder, as long as each
individual section is clearly identified.) Partial or incomplete submittal sections will not be
reviewed.
ARTICLE 9
EQUIPMENT PURCHASES
9.1
Arrange for purchase and delivery of all materials and equipment within 20 days after
approval of submittals. All materials and equipment must be ordered in ample quantities
for delivery at the proper time. If items are not on the project in time to expedite
completion, the Owner may purchase said equipment and materials and deduct the cost
from the contract sum.
9.2
Provide all materials of similar class or service by one manufacturer.
ARTICLE 10
COOPERATIVE WORK
10.1
Correct without charge any work requiring alteration due to lack of proper supervision or
failure to make proper provision in time. Correct without charge any damage to adjacent
work caused by the alteration.
10.2
Cooperative work includes: General supervision and responsibility for proper location
and size of work related to this Division, but provided under the other sections of these
specifications, and installation of sleeves, inserts, and anchor bolts for work under each
section in this Division.
ARTICLE 11
VERIFICATION OF DIMENSIONS
11.1
Scaled and figured dimensions are approximate only. Before proceeding with work,
carefully check and verify dimensions, etc., and be responsible for properly fitting
equipment and materials together and to the structure in spaces provided.
11.2
Drawings are essentially diagrammatic, and many offsets, bends, pull boxes, special
fittings, and exact locations are not indicated. Carefully study drawings and premises in
order to determine best methods, exact location, routes, building obstructions, etc. and
install apparatus and equipment in manner and locations to avoid obstructions, preserve
headroom, keep openings and passageways clear, and maintain proper clearances.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
26 01 00-3
ARTICLE 12
CUTTING AND PATCHING
12.1
All cutting and patching shall be in accordance with Division 1 of these specifications and
as noted below.
12.2
Cut existing work and patch as necessary to properly install new work. As the work
progresses, leave necessary openings, holes, chases, etc., in their correct location. If the
required openings, holes, chases, etc., are not in their correct locations, make the
necessary corrections at no cost to the Owner. Avoid excessive cutting and do not cut
structural members including wall framing without the consent of the Architect.
ARTICLE 13
13.1
ARTICLE 14
CLOSING-IN OF UNINSPECTED WORK
Cover no work until inspected, tested, and approved by the Architect. Where work is
covered before inspection and test, uncover it and when inspected, tested, and approved,
restore all work to original proper condition at no additional cost to Owner.
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
14.1
All excavation and backfill shall be in accordance with Division 1 of these specifications
and as noted below.
14.2
Perform all necessary excavation, shoring, and backfilling required for the proper laying
of all conduits inside the building and premises, and outside as may be necessary.
14.3
Excavate all trenches open cut, keep trench banks as nearly vertical as practicable, and
sheet and brace trenches where required for stability and safety. Excavate trenches true
to line and make bottoms no wider than necessary to provide ample work room. Grade
trench bottoms accurately. Machine grade only to the top line of the conduits, doing the
remainder by hand. Do not cut any trench near or under footings without first consulting
the Architect. All trenches shall be done in accordance with OSHA standards and
regulations.
14.4
Backfilling shall be done with each layer compacted before another layer is added. No
stones or coarse lumps shall be laid directly on a conduit or conduits.
14.5
Trenches shall be filled with the specified material. Sod, if any, shall be removed in cut
sections and replaced in same manners.
14.6
Provide pumps and drainage of all open trenches for purposes of installing electrical duct
and wiring.
14.7
Perform all backfilling in accordance with the requirements of and under the direction of
the Geotechnical Engineer.
14.8
Where new underground trenching is required on sites or in any area where existing
underground utilities exist, the Contractor shall provide an independent professional utility
locating service to locate exact vertical and horizontal locations of all existing utilities.
Where existing utilities are found the Contractor shall hand dig those areas to avoid
disruption. The Contractor shall be responsible for immediate repairs to existing
underground utilities damaged during construction. The Contractor shall repair all existing
asphalt, concrete and landscape surfaces damaged or removed during construction to
match their original conditions. Where trenching extends through public streets or
roadways, the Contractor shall notify underground service alert in addition to the
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
26 01 00-4
independent locating service 48 hours before start of construction to determine location
of existing utilities by calling (800) 422-4133.
ARTICLE 15
CONCRETE
15.1
Where used for structures to be provided under the contract such as bases, etc.,
concrete work, and associated reinforcing shall be as specified under Division 3 of these
specifications.
15.2
See other sections for additional requirements for underground vaults, cable ducts, etc.
ARTICLE 16
ACCESSIBILITY
16.1
Install all control devices or other specialties requiring reading, adjustment, inspection,
repairs, removal, or replacement conveniently and accessibly throughout the finished
building.
16.2
All required access doors or panels in walls and ceilings are to be furnished and installed
as part of the work under this Section. Refer to Division 1 of these specifications and as
noted below.
16.3
Where located in fire rated assemblies, provide doors which match the rating of the
assembly and are approved by the jurisdictional authority.
16.4
Refer to 'finish schedule' for types of walls and ceilings in each area and the architectural
drawings for rated wall construction.
16.5
Coordinate work of the various sections to locate specialties requiring accessibility with
others to avoid unnecessary duplication of access doors.
ARTICLE 17
17.1
ARTICLE 18
18.1
FLASHING
Flash and counter flash all conduits penetrating roofing membrane as shown on
Architectural drawings. All work shall be in accordance with Division 7 of these
specifications.
IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT
All electrical equipment shall be labeled, tagged, stamped, or otherwise identified in
accordance with the following schedules:
18.1.1 General:
18.1.1.1
In general, the installed laminated nameplates as hereinafter called
for shall also clearly indicate its use, areas served, circuit
identification, voltage and any other useful data.
18.1.1.2
All auxiliary systems, including communications, shall be labeled to
indicate function.
18.1.2 Lighting and Local Panelboards:
18.1.2.1
Panel identification shall be with white and
nameplates. Letters shall be no less than 3/8" high.
black micarta
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
26 01 00-5
18.1.2.2
Circuit directory shall be two column typewritten card set under glass
or glass equivalent. Each circuit shall be identified by the room
number and/or number of unit and other pertinent data as required.
18.1.3 Distribution Switchboards and Feeders Sections:
18.1.3.1
Identification shall be with 1" x 4" laminated white micarta
nameplates with black lettering on each major component, each with
name and/or number of unit and other pertinent data as required.
Letters shall be no less than 3/8" high.
18.1.3.2
Circuit breakers and switches shall be identified by number and
name with 3/8" x 1-1/2" laminated micarta nameplates with 3/16"
high letters mounted adjacent to or on circuit breaker or switch.
18.1.4 Disconnect Switches, Motor Starters and Transformers:
18.1.4.1
Identification shall be with white micarta laminated labels and 3/8"
high black lettering.
18.1.5 All communication system terminal boxes including T.V., telephone/intercom,
security, fire alarm, clock, and computer networking shall be provided with white
micarta laminated labels and 3/8" high black lettering.
ARTICLE 19
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
19.1
Furnish and maintain from the beginning to the completion all lawful and necessary
guards, railings, fences, canopies, lights, warning signs, etc. Take all necessary
precautions required by City, State Laws, and OSHA to avoid injury or damage to any
persons and property.
19.2
Temporary power and lighting for construction purposes shall be provided under this
Section. All work shall be in accordance with Division 1 of these specifications.
ARTICLE 20
20.1
ARTICLE 21
21.1
ARTICLE 22
22.1
GUARANTEE
Guarantee all material, equipment and workmanship for all sections under this Division in
writing to be free from defect of material and workmanship for one year from date of final
acceptance, as outlined in the general conditions. Replace without charge any material
or equipment proven defective during this period.
The guarantee shall include
performance of equipment under all site conditions, conditions of load, installing any
additional items of control and/or protective devices, as required.
PATENTS
Refer to the General Conditions for Contractor's responsibilities regarding patents.
EQUIPMENT ROUGH-IN
Rough-in all equipment, fixtures, etc. as designed on the drawings and as specified
herein. The drawings indicate only the approximate location of rough-ins. Mounting
heights of all switches, receptacles, wall mounted fixtures and such equipment must be
coordinated with the Architectural Designs. The Contractor shall obtain all rough-in
information before progressing with any work for rough-in connections. Minor changes in
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
26 01 00-6
the contract drawings shall be anticipated and provided for under this Division of the
specifications to comply with rough-in requirements.
ARTICLE 23
23.1
ARTICLE 24
24.1
OWNER FURNISHED AND OTHER EQUIPMENT
Rough-in and make final connections to all Owner furnished equipment shown on the
drawings and specified, and all equipment furnished under other sections of the
specifications.
EQUIPMENT FINAL CONNECTIONS
Provide all final connections for the following:
24.1.1 All equipment furnished under this Division.
24.1.2 Electrical equipment furnished under other sections of the specification.
24.1.3 Owner furnished equipment as specified under this Division.
ARTICLE 25
25.1
INSERTS, ANCHORS, AND MOUNTING SLEEVES
Inserts and anchors must be:
25.1.1 Furnished and installed for support of work under this Division.
25.1.2 Mounting of equipment that is of such size as to be free standing and that
equipment which cannot conveniently be located on walls, such as motor
starters, etc., shall be rigidly supported on a framework of galvanized steel angle
of Unistrut or B-line systems with all unfinished edges painted.
25.1.3 Furnish and install all sleeves as required for the installation of all work under all
Sections of this Division and for all communication systems including any
communication systems described in this Section which are bid to the General
Contractor. Sleeves through floors, roof, and walls shall be as described in
“Conduit and Fittings” Section 26 05 33.
ARTICLE 26
SEISMIC ANCHORING
26.1
All switchgear and other free standing electrical equipment or enclosures shall be
anchored to the floor and braced at the top of the equipment to the structure. Where
details have not been provided on the drawings, anchorage shall comply with CBC
Section 1616A.1.12. The Contractor shall submit drawings signed by the Contractors
registered structural Engineer indicating method of compliance prior installation.
26.2
All sound systems, communication, signal or data networking equipment or enclosures
shall be anchored to the structure. Where details have not been provided on the
drawings, anchorage shall comply with CBC Section 1616A.1.12. The Contractor shall
submit drawings signed by the Contractors registered Structural Engineer indicating
method of compliance prior to installation.
ARTICLE 27
27.1
RUST PROOFING
Rust proofing must be applied to all ferrous metals and shall be in accordance with
Section 05500 of these specifications and as noted below.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
26 01 00-7
27.1.1 Hot-dipped galvanized shall be applied and after forming of angle-iron, bolts,
anchors, etc.
27.1.2 Hot-dipped galvanized coating shall be applied after fabrication for junction boxes
and pull boxes cast in concrete.
ARTICLE 28
GENERAL WIRING
28.1
Where located adjacent in walls, outlet boxes shall not be placed back to back, nor shall
extension rings be used in place of double boxes, all to limit sound transmission between
rooms. Provide short horizontal nipple between adjacent outlet boxes, which shall have
depth sufficient to maintain wall coverage in rear by masonry wall.
28.2
In those instances where outlet boxes, recessed terminal boxes, or recessed equipment
enclosures are installed in a fire rated assembly, provide "Flamesafe FSD 1077" fire
stopping pads or approved equal, over the outlet or box.
28.3
Complete rough-in requirements of all equipment to be wired under the contract are not
indicated. Coordinate with respective trades furnishing equipment or with the Architect
as the case may be for complete and accurate requirements to result in a neat,
workmanlike installation.
ARTICLE 29
SEPARATE CONDUIT SYSTEMS
29.1
Each electrical and signal system shall be contained in a separate conduit system as
shown on the drawings and as specified herein. This includes each power system, each
lighting system, each signal system of whatever nature, telephone, standby system,
sound system, control system, fire alarm system, etc.
29.2
Further, each item of building equipment must have its own run of power wiring. Control
wiring may be included in properly sized conduit for equipment feeders of #6 AWG and
smaller, having separate conduit for larger sizes.
ARTICLE 30
CLEANUP
30.1
In addition to cleanup specified under other sections, thoroughly clean all parts of the
equipment. Where exposed parts are to be painted, thoroughly clean off any spattered
construction materials and remove all oil and grease spots. Wipe the surface carefully
and scrape out all cracks and corners.
30.2
Use steel brushes on exposed metal work to carefully remove rust, etc., and leave
smooth and clean.
30.3
During the progress of the work, keep the premises clean and free of debris.
ARTICLE 31
31.1
ARTICLE 32
PAINTING
Paint all unfinished metal as required in accordance with Division 1 of these
specifications. (Galvanized and factory painted equipment shall be considered as having
a sub-base finish.)
GENERAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
26 01 00-8
32.1
Remove existing work and items which are required to be removed in such manner that
minimum damage and disturbance is caused to adjacent and connection work scheduled
to remain. Repair or replace existing work schedule.
32.2
Include preparation of existing areas to receive new materials and removal of materials
and equipment to alter or repair the existing building as indicated and as specified.
32.3
Perform demolition exercising proper care to prevent injury to the public, workmen and
adjoining property.
32.4
Perform the removal, cutting, drilling of existing work with extreme care and use small
tools in order not to jeopardize the structural integrity of the building.
32.5
Rebuild to existing condition or better, existing work which has to be removed to allow the
installation of new work as required.
32.6
Remove, protect and reinstall existing items as indicated. Replace materials scheduled
for reuse which are damaged by the Contractor to the extent that they cannot be reused,
with equal quality material, and installation.
32.7
Do not reuse in this project materials and items removed from existing site or building,
except with specific written approval by the Architect in each case, unless such removed
material or item is specifically indicated or specified to be reused.
32.8
Remove materials and equipment indicated to be salvaged for reinstallation and store to
prevent damage, and reinstall as the work progresses. Do not reuse in this project, other
materials and equipment removed from existing site or building, except with specific
written approval by the Architect in each case.
32.9
Patch areas requiring patching, including damage caused by removing, relocating or
adding fixtures and equipment, damages caused by demolition at adjacent materials.
32.10
Do not stockpile debris in the existing building, without the approval of the Architect.
Remove debris as it accumulates from removal operations to a legal disposal area.
32.11
Contractor to assume existing oil filled and dry transformers, oil switches, ballasts, lamps,
wooden poles, cross arms, computers, computer monitors, and conductor insulation
containing materials considered hazardous. Comply with local, state and federal
regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling and protection against
exposure or environmental pollution. Contractor shall be responsible for removal of the
above hazardous materials where encountered. Include all costs for such removal as
part of this contract.
32.12
All fluorescent, compact fluorescent, high intensity discharge, metal halide, mercury
vapor, high and low pressure sodium, and neon lamps are to be disposed of as required
by the California Waste Rule Regulations as described in the California Code of
Regulations, Title 22, Division 4.5 and Chapter 23.
32.13
Communication System: Where new communication systems, (including telephone,
intercom, clock, security, fire alarm, data, multimedia, CATV or lighting controls) are
installed to replace existing systems, unless where otherwise directed the existing
systems shall remain fully operational until the new system has been installed and tested.
Demolition of the existing systems shall include removal of all equipment and associated
wiring and exposed conduits and providing new blank covers for all abandoned device
locations.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
26 01 00-9
32.14
Salvage Power Equipment:
The Contractor shall carefully remove all existing
switchboards, panelboards, transformers, and confirm in writing which items the Owner
wishes to keep. These items shall be transported to the Owner’s maintenance facilities
by the Contractor. All remaining items shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
32.15
Salvage Lighting Equipment: The Contractor shall confirm in writing which items the
Owner wishes to keep. These items shall be transported to the Owner’s maintenance
facilities by the Contractor. All remaining items shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
32.16
Salvage Communication Equipment: The Contractor shall carefully remove all
communication devices (telephone, intercom, clock, security, fire alarm, data, multimedia,
CATV or lighting controls) and box each type of devices separately. The Contractor shall
deliver all items to the Owner’s maintenance facility.
ARTICLE 33
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
33.1
Prior to completion of project, compile a complete equipment maintenance manual for all
equipment supplied under sections of this Division, in accordance with Division 1 of
these specifications and as described below.
33.2
Equipment Lists and Maintenance Manuals:
33.2.1 Prior to completion of job, Contractor shall compile a complete equipment list and
maintenance manuals. The equipment list shall include the following items for
every piece of material equipment supplied under this Section of the
specifications:
33.3
ARTICLE 34
34.1
33.2.1.1
Name, model, and manufacturer.
33.2.1.2
Complete parts drawings and lists.
33.2.1.3
Local supply for parts and replacement and telephone number.
33.2.1.4
All tags, inspection slips, instruction packages, etc., removed from
equipment as shipped from the factory, properly identified as to the
piece of equipment it was taken from.
Maintenance manuals shall be furnished for each applicable section of the specifications
and shall be suitably bound with hard covers and shall include all available
manufacturers’ operating and maintenance instructions, together with "as-built" drawings
to properly operate and maintain the equipment. The equipment lists and maintenance
manuals shall be submitted in duplicate to the Architect for approval not less than 10
days prior to the completion of the job. The maintenance manuals shall also include the
name, address, and phone numbers of all subcontractors involved in any of the work
specified herein. Four copies of the maintenance manuals bound in single volumes shall
be provided.
RECORD DRAWINGS
The Division 26 Contractor shall maintain record drawings as specified in accordance
with Division 1 of these specifications, and as noted below.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
26 01 00-10
34.2
Drawings shall show locations of all concealed underground conduit runs, giving the
number and size of conduit and wires. Underground ducts shall be shown with cross
section elevations and shall be dimensioned in relation to permanent structures to
indicate their exact location. Drawing changes shall not be identified only with
referencing CORs and RFIs, the drawings shall reflect all of the actual additions or
changes made. All as-built drawing information shall be prepared by the contractor in
AutoCAD, updating the contract computer files as needed to reflect actual installed
conditions for all site plans, lighting, power, communication, networking, audio visual,
security or fire alarms systems included in the scope of work for this project.
34.3
One set of these record drawings shall be delivered to the Architect. The engineer will
review documents for completeness, and will not be responsible for editing contractor
computer files.
ARTICLE 35
35.1
CHANGES AND EXTRA WORK
When changes in work are requested, the Division 26 Contractor shall provide unit
prices for the work involved in accordance with Division 1 of these specifications, and the
following:
35.1.1 The material Costs shall not exceed the latest edition of the “Trade Service“ end
column “C” price list. The materials prices may be higher only where the
Contractor can produce invoices to substantiate higher material costs. The
Contractor shall submit a print out copy of the trade service sheets with the
change order to substantiate these values.
35.1.2 The labor Costs shall not exceed the latest edition of the “NECA Manual of
Labor Units” normal column.
35.2
When credits in work are requested, the Division 26 Contractor shall provide unit prices
for the work involved in accordance with Division 1 of these specifications, and the
following:
35.2.1 The Material Costs shall not be less than 80% of the latest edition of the “Trade
Service“ end column price list. The materials prices may be lower only where the
Contractor can produce invoices to substantiate lower material costs. Restocking
fees may also be included in this amount where applicable.
35.2.2 The Labor Costs shall not be less than 80% of the latest edition of the “NECA
Manual of Labor Units” normal column.
35.3
Conduit pricing for conduits of all types sized 3" or smaller.
When changes in the scope of work require the Contractor to estimate conduit
Installations, they shall NOT include labor values (only material cost may be
included) for any of the below items. The labor values for conduit installation
represented in the NECA manual are inflated to a point where additional labor for the
below items can not be justified.
35.3.1 Couplings.
35.3.2 Set Screw or Compression Fittings, locknuts, Bushings and washers.
35.3.3 Conduit straps and associated screws or nails.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
26 01 00-11
35.3.4 LB fittings or other specialty fittings or specialty mounting hardware may be
included where needed.
35.4
Wire pricing for all types and sizes.
When changes in the scope of work require the Contractor to estimate wire installations
they shall NOT include labor values (only material cost may be included) for any of
the below items. The labor values for wire installation represented in the NECA manual
are inflated to a point where additional labor for the below items can not be justified.
35.4.1 Locknuts, Bushings, tape, wire markers.
35.5
When changes in the scope of work require other equipment installations such as lighting
fixtures, panelboards, switchboards, wiring devices, communications equipment etc. the
Contractor shall NOT include labor values (only material cost may be included) for
any of the below items. The labor values for these equipment items represented in the
NECA manual are inflated to a point where additional labor for the below items can not
be justified.
35.5.1 Associated screws, nails, bolts, anchors or supports.
35.5.2 Locknuts, washers, tape.
35.6
The total labor hours for extra work will be required to be calculated as follows:
35.6.1 Change orders with 1 to 30 total labor hours
General Laborer
Journeyman
Foreman
10%
10%
80%
of total labor hours
of total labor hours
of total labor hours
35.6.2 Change orders with 31 to 100 total labor hours
General Laborer
Journeyman
Foreman
20%
40%
40%
of total labor hours
of total labor hours
of total labor hours
35.6.3 Change orders with over 100 total labor hours
General Laborer
Journeyman
Foreman
30%
50%
20%
of total labor hours
of total labor hours
of total labor hours
35.7
When change orders are issued which allow the work to be completed in the normal
sequence of construction, the labor rates shall be based on the most current “Prevailing
Wage” – straight time total hourly rate. When change orders require the Contractor to
work out of sequence the “Prevailing Wage“ – daily overtime hourly rate shall apply.
Special condition situations shall be reviewed on an individual basis for alternate hourly
rate schedules.
35.8
Costs will not be permitted for additional supervision on site or office time for processing
any change order other than the 10% overhead allowance as described in Division 1.
Cost for special equipment required to install items for an individual change order are
permitted and must be individually identified. Lump Sum cost for small tools or any other
cost not specifically required for the change order are not permitted.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
26 01 00-12
35.9
Contractor estimates shall be formatted to clearly identify each of the following:
35.9.1 Line item description of each type of material or labor item.
35.9.2 Description of quantity for each item.
35.9.3 Description of (material cost per / quantity).
35.9.4 Description of (labor cost per / quantity).
35.9.5 Description of total labor hour breakdown per Foreman, Journeyman or General
Laborer as described above.
ARTICLE 36
36.1
ELECTRONIC FILES
The Contractor shall make a written request directly to Johnson Consulting Engineers for
electronic drawing files. As a part of the written request, please include the following
information:
36.1.1 Clearly indicate each drawing sheet needed (i.e., E1.1, E2.1, etc.).
36.1.2 Identify the name, phone number, mailing address and e-mail address of the
person to receive the files.
36.1.3 Provide written confirmation and agreement with the requirements described for
payment of computer files, as described below.
36.2
Detail or riser diagram sheets, or any other drawings other than floor plans or site plans,
will not be made available to the Contractor.
36.3
Files will only be provided in the AutoCAD format in which they were created.
36.4
Requests for files will be processed as soon as possible; a minimum of 7 working days
should be the normal processing time. The Contractor shall be completely responsible
for requesting the files in time for their use.
END OF SECTION
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
26 01 00-13
SECTION 26 05 19
POWER CONDUCTORS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
Furnish and install wire and cable for branch circuits and feeders specified herein and as
shown on the electrical drawings.
1.2
Submittals: Submit manufacturers’ data for the following items:
1.2.1
1.3
All cables and terminations
Common submittal mistakes which will result in the submittals being rejected:
1.3.1
Not including all items listed in the above itemized description.
1.3.2
Including catalog cut sheets which have several items on a page, and not clearly
identifying by highlighting, underlining, or clouding the items to be reviewed, or
crossing out the items which are not applicable.
1.3.3
Not including actual manufacturer’s catalog information of proposed products.
1.3.4
Do not include multiple manufacturers for similar products and do not indicate “or
approved equal” statements, or “to be determined later” statements. The
products being submitted must be the products installed
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
Wire and cable Rated 120 volt to 600 volt.
2.1.1
All wire and cable shall be new, 600 volt insulated copper, of types specified
below for each application. All wire and cable shall bear the UL label and shall
be brought to the job in unbroken packages. Wire insulation shall be the color as
specified herein and shall be type THWN-2. Insulated conductors shall be
installed in all exterior exposed raceways. Conductors for branch circuit lighting,
receptacle, power and miscellaneous systems shall be a minimum of No. 12
AWG. Increase conductor size to No. 10 AWG for 120 volt circuits greater than
100 feet from the panel to the load and for 277 volt circuits greater than 200 feet
from the panel to the load. Circuit home-runs indicated to be larger than No. 12
must be increased the entire length of the circuit, including equipment grounding
conductor. Wire sizes No. 14 through No. 10 shall be solid. No. 8 and larger
shall be stranded.
2.1.2
Aluminum conductors will not be permitted.
2.1.3
MC type armored cable reference Section 26 05 33.
Wire and cable for systems below120 volts.
2.2.1
All low voltage and communications systems cables routed underground shall be
provided with a moisture resistant outer jacket, West Penn “Aquaseal” or equal,
unless otherwise specified.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
POWER CONDUCTORS
26 05 19-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Wire and cable shall be pulled into conduits without strain using powdered soapstone,
mineralac, or other approved lubricant. In no case shall wire be repulled if same has
been pulled out of a conduit run for any purpose. No conductor shall be pulled into
conduit until conduit system is complete, including junction boxes, pull boxes, etc.
3.2
All connections of wires shall be made as noted below:
3.3
3.4
3.2.1
Connections to outlets and switches: Wire formed around binding post of screw.
3.2.2
No. 10 wire and smaller: Circuit wiring connections to lighting fixtures and other
hard wired equipment shall be made with pressure type solderless connectors,
Buchanan, Scotchlock, Wing Nut, or approved equal. Alternate “WAGO” #773
series or “IDEAL” #32, 33, 34 and 39 series push wire style connectors are also
acceptable.
All wiring shall be continuous without splicing unless where specifically noted on the
drawings or where permitted below.
3.3.1
No. 10 wire and smaller above grade: Quantities as needed, connection made
with pressure type solderless connectors, Scotchlock or equal.
3.3.2
No. 10 wire and smaller below grade: Quantities as needed, connection made
with ‘Raychem’ long barrel compression terminals with crimping tool and quantity
of crimps as recommended by manufacturer, provide ‘Raychem’ WCSM-S series
in-line heat shrink, sealant coated splice kit. Alternate products must be UL listed
for direct burial/submersible and rated to (1000V).
3.3.3
No. 8 wire and larger above grade: Quantities only where indicated, ‘Raychem’
long barrel compression terminals with crimping tool and quantity of crimps as
recommended by manufacturer, provide ‘Raychem’ WCSM-S series in-line heat
shrink, sealant coated splice kit. Alternate products must be UL listed for direct
burial/submersible and rated to (1000V).
3.3.4
No. 8 wire and larger below grade: Quantities only where indicated, ‘Raychem’
long barrel compression terminals with crimping tool and quantity of crimps as
recommended by manufacturer, provide ‘Raychem’ WCSM-S series in-line heat
shrink, sealant coated splice kit. Alternate products must be UL listed for direct
burial/submersible and rated to (1000V).
All wiring throughout shall be color coded as follows:
480 volt system
A Phase
B Phase
C Phase
Neutral
Ground
3.5
Brown
Orange
Yellow
Grey
Green
208 or 240 volt system
Black
Red
Blue
White
Green
Wiring must be color coded throughout its entire length, except feeders may have color
coded plastic tape at both ends and any other accessible point.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
POWER CONDUCTORS
26 05 19-2
3.6
All control wiring in a circuit shall be color coded, each phase leg having a separate color,
and with all segments of the control circuit, whether in apparatus or conduit, utilizing the
same color coding.
3.7
At all terminations of control wiring, the wiring shall have a numbered T&B or Brady
plastic wire marker.
3.8
Cables when installed are to be properly trained in junction boxes, etc., and in such a
manner as to prevent any forces on the cable which might damage the cable.
3.9
All conductors to be installed into a common raceway, shall be pulled into the raceway at
the same time.
3.10
All conductors shall be installed in such a manner as to not exceed the manufacturers’
recommended pulling tension and bending radius. The equipment used for pulling must
be specifically designed for the purpose. Motorized vehicles such as pickup trucks, are
not acceptable.
END OF SECTION
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
POWER CONDUCTORS
26 05 19-3
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
Furnish and install grounding and grounding conductors and electrodes as specified
herein and as shown on the drawings.
1.2
Submit catalog data for all components.
1.3
Common submittal mistakes which will result in the submittals being rejected:
1.3.1
Not including all items listed in the above itemized description.
1.3.2
Including catalog cut sheets which have several items on a page, and not clearly
identifying by highlighting, underlining or clouding the items to be reviewed, or
crossing out the items which are not applicable.
1.3.3
Not including actual manufacturer’s catalog information of proposed products.
1.3.4
Do not include multiple manufacturers for similar products and do not indicate
“or approved equal” statements, or “to be determined later” statements. The
products being submitted must be the products installed.
PART 2 – EXECUTION
2.1
Grounding
2.1.1
All panelboard cabinets, equipment, enclosures, and complete conduit system
shall be grounded securely in accordance with pertinent sections of CEC Article
250. Conductors shall be copper. All electrically operated equipment shall be
bonded to the grounded conduit system. All non-current carrying conductive
surfaces that are likely to become energized and subject to personal contact shall
be grounded by one or more of the methods detailed in CEC Article 250. All
ground connections shall have clean contact surfaces. Install all grounding
conductors in conduit and make connections readily accessible for inspection.
2.1.2
Provide an insulated equipment grounding conductor in all branch circuit and
feeder raceway systems, sized in accordance with CEC 250-1122.
2.1.3
Provide an additional individual insulated grounding conductor for each circuit
which contains an isolated ground receptacle or surge suppression receptacle.
2.1.4
Grounding of metal raceways shall be assured by means of provisions of
grounding bushings on feeder conduit terminations at the panelboard, and by
means of insulated continuous stranded copper grounding wire extended from the
ground bus in the panelboard to the conduit grounding bushings.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
GROUNDING
26 05 26-1
2.1.5
Except for connections which access for periodic testing is required, make
grounding connections which are buried or otherwise inaccessible by exothermite
type process.
2.1.6
The following ohmic values shall be test certified for each item listed. A written
report signed and witnessed by the project IOR shall be provided to the engineer.
If the ohmic value listed cannot be obtained additional grounding shall be
installed to reach the value listed.
2.1.6.1 Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 ohms.
2.1.6.2 Step down transformers and non-current carrying metal parts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 ohms.
2.1.6.3 Manholes, handholes, etc.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 ohms.
END OF SECTION 260526
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
GROUNDING
26 05 26-2
SECTION 26 05 33
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
Furnish and install conduit and fittings as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2
Submit Manufacturer’s data on the following:
1.3
1.2.1
Conduit.
1.2.2
Fittings
1.2.3
Fire stopping Material.
1.2.4
Surface Raceways.
1.2.5
Type MC cable, provide construction details and UL “E” number.
Common submittal mistakes which will resulting in the submittals being rejected:
1.3.1
Not including all items listed in the above itemized description.
1.3.2
Including catalog cut sheets which have several items on a page, and not clearly
identifying by highlighting, underlining or clouding the items to be reviewed, or
crossing out the items which are not applicable.
1.3.3
Not including actual manufacturer’s catalog information of proposed products.
1.3.4
Do not include multiple manufacturers for similar products and do not indicate “or
approved equal” statements, or “to be determined later” statements. The
products being submitted must be the products installed.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
Rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), electrical metallic tubing (EMT) and
flexible metallic conduit shall be steel, hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.
2.2
PVC conduit shall be Carlon or approved equal.
2.3
Liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall be Anaconda Sealtite type UA or approved equal.
Fittings shall be Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, Steel City, T&B, or equivalent.
2.4
MC type armored cable, when utilized, shall be provided with the following:
2.4.1
Comply with UL 1479 and CEC 330-22(c).
2.4.2
90ºC, copper, THHN conductors.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
26 05 33-1
2.4.3
Minimum #12 insulated grounding conductor.
2.4.4
Conductors sized No. 10 and smaller shall be solid, No. 8 and larger shall be
stranded.
2.4.5
Oversized (150%) neutrals or separate neutrals shall be provided.
2.4.6
Increase phase conductors to No. 10 AWG for 120 volt circuits greater than 100
feet from panel to load and for 277 volt circuits greater than 200 feet from panel
to load. Where required increase conductor sizes for entire length of circuit.
2.4.7
Interlocked armored aluminum sheath.
2.4.8
AC or BX type armored cable shall not be substituted in lieu of MC type cable.
2.4.9
Color code cable according to cable type and configuration.
2.4.10 Acceptable manufacturers are AFC and Alflex.
2.5
Fire stopping material shall provide an effective seal against fire, heat, smoke and fire
gases. Fire stopping material shall be tested to comply with ASTME 814 and UL 1479.
The submittal for this product shall include the UL listed system number and installation
requirements for each type of penetration seal required for this project.
2.6
Each length of conduit shall be stamped with the name or trademark of the manufacturer
and shall bear the UL label.
2.7
All plastic conduit shall be rigid, schedule 40, heavy wall PVC. All PVC conduit shall be
UL listed. Underground utility company conduits shall comply with local utility co.
requirements.
2.8
Plastic conduit shall be stored on a flat surface, and protected from the direct rays of the
sun.
2.9
Where branch circuit or communication raceways cannot be concealed in ceilings or
walls and are required to be exposed in interior spaces, provide nonmetallic surface
raceway system sized per the manufacturer capacity requirements. A full complement of
nonmetallic fittings must be available and matching device boxes and cover plates must
be provided. The color of the raceway system, components and boxes shall be (white).
Where data networking cabling is to be installed, all raceway fittings shall meet Category
5 radius requirements. Where specific raceway types have been noted on the drawings
they shall be as follows:
2.9.1
System 'SR'
Hubbell
Wiremold
Panduit
Hellerman-Tyton
WALLTRAK 1 series
ECLIPSE PN05series
LD5 series
TSR2 series
2.9.2
System 'SR2'
Hubbell
Wiremold
Panduit
WALTRAK 22
2300D Series
D2P10
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
26 05 33-2
2.9.3
System 'SR3'
Hellerman-Tyton
TSR3 series
Hubbell
Wiremold
Panduit
Hellerman-Tyton
BASETRAK series
5400 - series
70 series
MCR Infostream" series
Provide with offset boxes, inline boxes may only be used where
specifically shown on the drawings.
PART 3 – FITTINGS
3.1
All metallic fittings, including those for EMT, flexible conduit, or malleable iron. Die cast
fittings of any other material are not permitted.
3.2
Locknuts shall be steel or malleable iron with sharp clean cut threads.
3.3
Entrance seals shall be 0.Z. type FSK or equivalent.
3.4
Bushings and locknuts: Where conduits enter boxes, panels, cabinets, etc., they shall be
rigidly clamped to the box by locknuts on the outside, and a lock nut and plastic bushing
on the inside of the box. All conduits shall enter the box squarely.
3.5
Furnish and install insulated bushings as per CEC article No. 300 - 4 (F) on all conduits.
The use of insulated bushings does not exclude the use of double locknuts to fasten
conduit to the box.
3.6
Transition from plastic to steel conduits shall be with PVC female threaded adaptors.
3.7
Couplings and connectors for rigid steel or IMC conduit must be threaded, or
compression type (set screw fittings are not permitted).
3.8
Couplings and connectors for EMT shall be compression, watertight.
connectors are not acceptable, except for systems below 120 volts.
3.9
MC type armored cable shall be provided with listed clamp type die cast zinc set screw
connectors. Anti-short bushings shall be provided at all cable ends.
3.10
Connectors for flexible metal conduit shall be steel or malleable iron with screw provided
to clinch the conduit into the adapter body. For sizes up to ¾'' a screw-in, "Jake type,”
fitting may be used.
3.11
Install approved expansion fittings, or liquid tight flex conduit with a minimum 6" slack for
conduits passing through all expansion and seismic joints.
Set screw
PART 4 - EXECUTION
4.1
All branch circuits shall be installed concealed in walls or above ceilings or in concrete
floor slabs. PVC conduits installed in concrete floor slabs shall transition to PVC coated
rigid steel where conduits penetrate above finished grade or finished floor.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
26 05 33-3
4.2
Conduit sizes for various numbers and sizes of wire shall be as required by the CEC, but
not smaller than ½" for power wiring and ¾" for communications and fire alarm systems
unless otherwise noted. Conduit in slab or below grade shall be ¾" minimum trade size,
unless otherwise identified.
4.3
Conduit size shall be such that the required number and sizes of wires can be easily
pulled in and the Contractor shall be responsible for the selection of the conduit sizes to
facilitate the ease of pulling. Conduit sizes shown on the drawings are minimum sizes in
accordance with appropriate tables in the CEC. If because of bends or elbows a larger
conduit size is required, the Contractor shall so furnish without further cost to the Owner.
4.4
The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the proper protection of this work from the
other trades on the job. When conduit becomes bent or holes are punched through
same, or outlets moved after being roughed-in, the Contractor shall replace same,
without additional cost to the Owner.
4.5
Rigid steel conduit or IMC shall be used as follows:
4.6
4.7
4.5.1
Exposed exterior locations.
4.5.2
Exposed interior locations below eight feet above floor, except in electrical rooms
and closets.
4.5.3
In hazardous or classified areas as required by CEC.
EMT conduit shall be used for areas as follows:
4.6.1
All interior communications, signal, and data networking systems.
4.6.2
All interior power wiring systems where not required to be in rigid steel, IMC or
flexible conduit.
Flexible conduit shall be used for areas as follows:
4.7.1
To connect motors, transformers, and other equipment subjected to vibration or
where specifically detailed on the drawings.
4.7.2
Flexible conduit shall not be used to replace EMT in other locations where the
conduit will be exposed.
4.7.3
Flexible metal conduit shall be ferrous.
Installation shall be such that
considerable slack is realized. The conduit shall contain separate code sized
grounding conductor.
4.7.4
Liquid tight flexible conduit shall be used in conformance with CEC in lengths not
to exceed 4'. For equipment connections, route the conduit at 90 degrees to the
adjacent path for point of connection. The conduit shall contain separate code
sized grounding conductor. Use liquid tight flexible conduit for all equipment
connections exposed in possible wet, corrosive or oil contaminated areas, e.g.,
shops and outside areas.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
26 05 33-4
4.8
MC armored cable may be used as follows:
4.8.1
4.9
All branch circuit wiring for lighting and power circuits where permitted and
installed in compliance with UL 1569 and CEC 330.
MC armored cable shall not be used for the following areas:
4.9.1
Any exterior, underground or buried in concrete circuits.
4.9.2
Any circuits feeding HVAC equipment or pumps or any circuit with 30 AMPs or
greater overcurrent protection.
4.9.3
Any exposed interior locations except in electrical, communication or mechanical
equipment rooms.
4.9.4
Any exposed interior damp/wet locations, kitchens, science classrooms, shop
areas, or concealed in science classroom casework, unless provided with
approved PVC jacket.
4.9.5
Any hazardous rated area.
4.10
Plastic conduit shall be used for all exterior underground, in slab, and below slab on
grade conduit installations. Install bell ends at all conduit terminations in manholes and
pull boxes. Where plastic conduit transitions from below grade to above grade, no plastic
conduit shall extend above finished exterior grade, or above interior finished floor level.
4.11
Plastic conduit joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations for the particular conduit and coupling selected. Conduit joint
couplings shall be made watertight. Plastic conduit joints shall be made up by brushing a
plastic solvent cement on the inside of a plastic fitting and on the outside of the conduit
ends. The conduit and fitting shall then be slipped together with a quick one-quarter turn
twist to set the joint tightly.
4.12
All underground conduit depths shall be as detailed on the drawings or a minimum of 30"
below finished grade (when not specifically detailed otherwise), for all exterior
underground conduits. Where concrete slurry or concrete encasement is provided,
include “Red” color dye in mixture.
4.13
All underground conduits for power systems (600v and higher), shall be concrete
encased and a minimum of 48” below grade or as detailed on the drawings. Where
concrete slurry or concrete encasement is provided, include “Red” color dye in mixture.
4.14
Conduit shall be continuous from outlet to outlet, cabinet or junction box, and shall be so
arranged that wire may be pulled in with the minimum practical number of junction boxes.
4.15
All conduits shall be concealed wherever possible. All conduit runs may be exposed in
mechanical equipment rooms, electrical equipment rooms, electrical closets, and in
existing or unfinished spaces. No conduit shall be run exposed in finished areas without
the specific approval of the Architect.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
26 05 33-5
4.16
All raceways which are not buried or embedded in concrete shall be supported by straps,
clamps, or hangers to provide a rigid installation. Exposed conduit shall be run in straight
lines at right angles to or parallel with walls, beams, or columns. In no case shall conduit
be supported or fastened to other pipes or installed to prevent the ready removal of other
trades piping. Wire shall not be used to support conduit.
4.17
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to consult the other trades before installing
conduit and boxes. Any conflict between the location of conduit and boxes, piping, duct
work, or structural steel supports, shall be adjusted before installation. In general, large
pipe mains, waste, drain, and steam lines shall be given priority.
4.18
Conduits above lay-in grid type ceilings shall be installed in such a manner that they do
not interfere with the "lift-out" feature of the ceiling system. Conduit runs shall be
installed to maintain the following minimum spacing wherever practical.
4.18.1 Water and waste piping not less than 3".
4.18.2 Steam and steam condensate lines not less than 12".
4.18.3 Radiation and reheat lines not less than 6".
4.19
Provide all necessary sleeves and chases required where conduits pass through floors or
walls as part of the work of this section. Core drilling will only be permitted where
approved by the Architect.
4.20
All empty conduits and surface mounted raceways shall be provided with a ¼"
polypropylene plastic pull cord and threaded plastic or metal plugs over the ends. Fasten
plastic "Dymo" tape label to exposed spare conduit to identify "power" or
"communication" system, and to where it goes.
4.21
The ends of all conduits shall be securely plugged, and all boxes temporarily covered to
prevent foreign material from entering the conduits during construction. All conduit shall
be thoroughly swabbed out with a dry swab to remove moisture and debris before
conductors are drawn into place.
4.22
Bending: Changes in direction shall be made by bends in the conduit. These shall be
made smooth and even without flattening the pipe or flaking the finish. Bends shall be of
as long a radius as possible, and in no case smaller than CEC requirements.
4.22.1 For power conduits for conductors (600v and below), provide minimum 36” radius
(vertical) and 72” radius (horizontal) bends.
4.22.2 For power conduits for conductors (greater than 600v), provide minimum 72”
radius (vertical) and 72” radius (horizontal) bends.
4.23
Supports: Conduit shall be supported at intervals as required by the California Electrical
Code. Where conduits are run individually, they shall be supported by approved conduit
straps or beam clamps. Straps shall be secured by means of toggle bolts on hollow
masonry, machine screws or bolts on metal surfaces, and wood screws on wood
construction. [No perforated straps or wire hangers of any kind will be permitted.
Where individual conduits are routed, or above ceilings, they shall be supported by
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
26 05 33-6
hanger rods and hangers.] Conduits installed exposed in damp locations shall be
provided with clamp backs under each conduit clamp, to prevent accumulation of
moisture around the conduits.
4.24
Where a number of conduits are to be run exposed and parallel, one with another, they
shall be grouped and supported by trapeze hangers. Hanger rods shall be fastened to
structural steel members with suitable beam clamps or to concrete inserts set flush with
surface. A reinforced rod shall be installed through the opening provided in the concrete
inserts. Beam clamps shall be suitable for structural members and conditions. Rods
shall be galvanized steel 3/8" diameter minimum. Each conduit shall be clamped to the
trapeze hanger with conduit clamps.
4.25
All concrete inserts and pipe clamps shall be galvanized. All steel bolts, nuts, washers,
and screws shall be galvanized or cadmium plated. Individual hangers, trapeze hangers
and rods shall be prime-coated.
4.26
Openings through fire rated floors/walls and/or smoke walls through which conduits pass
shall be sealed by Fire stopping material to comply with Division 1 to seal off flame, heat,
smoke and fire gases. Sleeves shall be provided for power or communication system
cables which are not installed in conduits, and shall be sealed inside and out to comply
with manufacturers UL system design details. Where multiple conduits and/or cable tray
systems pass thru fire-rated walls at one location, the Contractor shall submit copies of
the manufacturers UL system design details proposed for use on this project. All Fire
stopping material shall have an hourly fire-rating equal to or higher than the fire rating of
the floor or wall through which the conduit, cables, or cable trays pass.
4.27
Provide cap or other sealing type fitting on all spare conduits. Conduits stubbed into
buildings from underground where cable only extends to equipment, the conduit/cable
end shall be sealed to prevent moisture from entering the room or space.
4.28
All conduits which are part of a paralleled feeder or branch circuit shall be installed
underground.
4.29
All conduits which are required as a part of systems specified in Divisions 27 or 28, or
any other low voltage communication systems, shall be furnished and installed by the
Division 26 Contractor.
4.29.1 The Contractor shall coordinate all conduit requirements with each system
supplier prior to bid to determine special conduit system requirements.
4.29.2 The Contractor shall provide a pull rope in all conduits for these systems.
4.29.3 The Contractor shall provide conduit sleeves for all open cable installations thru
rated walls or block walls. Provide conduit from each building main termination
cabinet or backboard to the nearest accessible ceiling for access into all
electrical or communications rooms.
4.30
In addition to the above requirements, the following requirements shall apply to all data
networking conduits:
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
26 05 33-7
4.30.1 Flexible metal conduit may only be used where required at building seismic
and/or expansion joints.
4.30.2 All underground conduits shall be provided with minimum 24" radius elbows
(vertical) and 60” (horizontal).
4.30.3 No length of conduit above grade shall be installed to exceed 150 feet between
pull boxes, or points of connection, unless where specifically detailed on the
drawings.
4.30.4 No length of conduit shall be installed to exceed two 90 degree bends between
pull boxes, or points of connection, unless where specifically detailed on the
drawings.
4.31
Where surface raceways are installed in interior spaces, the Contractor shall take care to
route in straight lines at right angles to or parallel with walls, beams, or columns. All
raceways and device boxes shall be securely screwed to the finish surface with zinc
screw “Auger” anchors Stk #ZSA1K by Gray Bar Electric or equal. Tape adhesive
application will not be permitted.
4.32
The Contractor who installs surface raceway systems shall provide and install complete
with wire retention clips, one for every (8) vertical feet or (5) horizontal feet or portion
thereof. This Contractor shall also provide each raceway channel with pull strings.
4.33
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor installing the raceway to coordinate the
installation of raceway device plates and inserts with the communications or data
contractors.
4.34
MC cable shall be cut using a specific metallic sheath armor stripping tool. The use of
hacksaws, dikes or any other tools not specifically designed to remove the armor sheath
will not be permitted.
4.35
MC cables installed in attic spaces or above lay-in ceilings shall be installed to be
protected from physical damage. The cable shall be mounted along the sides or bottom
of joists, rafters or studs.
4.36
Support wires used for supporting ceilings, lighting fixtures or other equipment items shall
not be used to support MC cables. Conduits, duct work, piping or any other equipment
shall not be used to support or mount MC cables.
4.37
MC cable supports, fasteners and clips shall be designed specifically for use with MC
cables. Standard conduit supports, fasteners and clips, nails or other items are not
permitted for installing MC cables.
END OF SECTION
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
26 05 33-8
SECTION 26 05 34
OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
Furnish and install electrical wiring boxes as specified and as shown on the electrical
drawings.
1.2
Submit manufacturer's data for all items.
1.3
Common submittal mistakes which will resulting in the submittals being rejected:
1.3.1
Not including all items listed in the above itemized description.
1.3.2
Including catalog cut sheets which have several items on a page, and not clearly
identifying by highlighting, underlining or clouding the items to be reviewed, or
crossing out the items which are not applicable.
1.3.3
Not including actual manufacturer’s catalog information of proposed products.
1.3.4
Do not include multiple manufacturers for similar products and do not indicate “or
approved equal” statements, or “to be determined later” statements. The
products being submitted must be the products installed.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
Boxes shall be as manufactured by Steel City, Appleton, Raco, or approved equal.
2.2
All boxes must conform to the provisions of Article 370 of the CEC. All boxes shall be of
the proper size to accommodate the quantity of conductors enclosed in the box. Minimum
box size shall be 4" square x 1-½" deep.
2.3
Boxes generally shall be hot dipped galvanized steel with knockouts. Boxes on exterior
surfaces or in damp locations shall be corrosion resistant, cast feraloy and shall have
threaded hubs for rigid conduit and neoprene gaskets for their covers. Boxes shall be
Appleton Type FS, Crouse-Hinds, or the approved equal. Conduit bodies shall be
corrosion resistant, cast malleable iron. Conduit bodies shall have threaded hubs for rigid
conduit and neoprene gaskets for their covers. Conduit bodies shall be Appleton Unilets,
Crouse-Hinds, or the approved equal. Where recessed, boxes shall have square cut
corners.
2.4
Deep boxes shall be used in wall covered by wainscot or paneling and in walls or glazed
tile, brick, or other masonry which will not be covered with plaster. Through the wall type
boxes shall not be used unless specifically called for. All boxes shall be nongangable.
Boxes in concrete shall be of a type to allow the placing of conduit without displacing the
reinforcing bars. All lighting fixture outlet boxes shall be equipped with the proper fittings
to support and attach a light fixture.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
26 05 34-1
2.5
All light, switch, receptacle, and similar outlets shall be provided with approved boxes,
suitable for their function. Back boxes shall be furnished and installed as required for the
equipment and/or systems under this contract.
2.6
Pull and junction boxes shall be code gauge boxes with screw covers. Boxes shall be
rigid under torsional and deflecting forces and shall be provided with angle from framing
where required. Boxes shall be 4" square with a blank cover in unfinished areas and with
a plaster ring and blank cover in finished areas. Covers for flush mounted oversize
boxes shall extend ¾" past boxes all around. Covers for 4" square boxes shall extend ¼"
past box all around.
2.7
All terminal cabinets and junction boxes or equipment back boxes which are required as
a part of systems specified in Divisions 27 or 28, or any other low voltage communication
systems, shall be furnished and installed by the Division 26 Contractor.
2.8
2.9
2.7.1
The Division 26 Contractor shall coordinate all box requirements with each
system supplier prior to bid to determine special cabinet or back box
requirements. The Contractor shall also provide stainless steel blank cover
plates for all low voltage systems installed for future equipment.
2.7.2
The Contractor shall provide all plywood backboards indicated on walls or inside
equipment enclosures. All backboards shall be a minimum of ¾" thick fire rated
type plywood.
2.7.3
The Contractor shall coordinate exact rough in locations and requirements with
each system supplier.
In addition to the above requirements, boxes for data networking wiring and equipment
shall comply with the following:
2.8.1
All boxes shall be a minimum of 4-11/16" square x 2-1/8" deep.
2.8.2
Where pull boxes are required on individual conduits 1-¼" or smaller, provide 411/16" square x 2-1/8" deep boxes. Where pull boxes are required on conduits
larger than 1-¼" for straight pull through, provide eight times the conduit trade
size for box length. Where pull boxes are required on conduits larger than 1-¼"
for an angle or a U-pull through installation, provide a minimum distance of six
times the conduit trade size between the entering and exiting conduit run for
each cable.
Recessed boxes installed in fire rated floors/walls and /or smoke walls shall be sealed by
Fire stopping material to comply with Division 1 to seal off flame, heat, smoke and fire
gases. The Contractor shall submit copies of the manufacturers UL system design
details proposed for use on this project. All Fire stopping material shall have an hourly
fire-rating equal to or higher than the fire rating of the floor or wall through which the
conduit, cables, or cable trays pass.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
Boxes shall be installed where required to pull cable or wire, but in finished areas only by
approval of the Architect. Boxes shall be rigidly attached to the structure, independent of
any conduit support. Boxes shall have their covers accessible. Covers shall be fastened
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
26 05 34-2
to boxes with machine screws to ensure continuous contact all around.
surface mounted boxes shall line up evenly with the edges of the boxes.
Covers for
3.2
Outlets are only approximately located on the plans and great care must be used in the
actual location of the outlets by consulting the various detailed drawings and
specifications. Outlets shall be flush with finished wall or ceiling, boxes installed
symmetrically on such trim or fixture. Refer to drawings for location and orientation of all
outlet boxes.
3.3
Furnish and install all plaster rings as may be required. Plaster rings shall be installed on
all boxes where the boxes are recessed. Plaster rings shall be of a depth to reach the
finished surface. Where required, extension rings shall be installed so that the plaster
ring is flush with the finished surface.
3.4
All cabinets and boxes shall be secured by means of toggle bolts on hollow masonry;
expansion shields and machine screws or standard precast inserts on concrete or solid
masonry; machine screws or bolts on metal surfaces and wood screws on wood
construction. All wall and ceiling mounted outlet boxes shall be supported by bar
supports extending from the studs or channels on either side of the box. Boxes mounted
on drywall or plaster shall be secured to wall studs or adequate internal structure.
3.5
Boxes with unused punched-out openings shall have the openings filled with factorymade knockout seals.
3.6
Where standby power and normal power are to be located in the same outlet box or 480V
in a switch box, install partition barriers to separate the various systems.
3.7
All outlet boxes and junction boxes for fire alarm system shall be painted red.
END OF SECTION
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
26 05 34-3
SECTION 26 05 43
UNDERGROUND PULL BOXES AND MANHOLES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
Furnish and install electrical underground pullboxes and manholes as specified and as
shown on the electrical drawings.
1.2
Submit manufacturer's data for all items.
1.3
Common submittal mistakes which will result in the submittals being rejected:
1.3.1
Not including all items listed in the above itemized description.
1.3.2
Including catalog cut sheets which have several items on a page, and not clearly
identifying by highlighting, underlining or clouding the items to be reviewed, or
crossing out the items which are not applicable.
1.3.3
Not including actual manufacturer’s catalog information of proposed products.
1.3.4
Do not include multiple manufacturers for similar products and do not indicate “or
approved equal” statements or “to be determined later” statements. The
products being submitted must be the products installed.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
The concrete for pull boxes and manholes shall be class 5500 psi or as noted on the
drawings. All pullboxes and manholes and covers located in parking lots, driveways,
roads, or any other driveable areas shall be traffic rated.
2.2
Each manhole shall be provided with a fiberglass ladder and ground rod. Ground rods
shall be copper or a copper-clad steel 3/4" diameter by 10-feet long. All non-current
carrying metallic components shall be grounded to the ground rods with minimum #6
copper wire.
2.3
All underground pullboxes shall be provided with steel bolt down type covers. Bolts shall
be bronze or brass. All communication or signal system pullboxes shall be sized to
comply with CEC Article 370 unless where other sizes are specifically noted on the
drawings.
2.4
All underground pullbox and manhole covers shall be provided with either "electrical" or
"telephone" or "fire alarm" markings. The telephone marking shall be used to identify
telephone, T.V., clock or any other types of communication systems.
2.5
All power and communication systems shall be provided with separate pullboxes or
manholes. Fire alarm circuits shall also be provided with separate pullboxes from any
other type of communication systems.
PART 3 – INSTALLATION
3.1
Shoring of the excavation shall be in accordance with all federal, state and local
regulations.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
UNDERGROUND PULL BOXES AND MANHOLES
26 05 43–1
3.2
Provide sealing material for the joints between sections per manufacturer’s instructions.
3.3
The contractor shall make the top and access assembly or lid flush with surrounding
areas where installed in driveable or normal walking areas.
END OF SECTION
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
UNDERGROUND PULL BOXES AND MANHOLES
26 05 43–2
SECTION 26 24 16
PANEL BOARDS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
Furnish and install branch circuit panel boards as specified herein and as indicated on
the drawings. Submit manufacturers’ data on all items.
1.2
Submit manufacturers’ data on all panel boards and components including:
1.2.1
Enclosures and covers
1.2.2
Breakers
1.2.3
Surge Protective Device (SPD) equipment
1.2.4
Incident energy level calculations
1.2.5
Common submittal mistakes which will result in the submittals being rejected:
1.2.5.1
Not arranging the circuit breakers in panels to match the orientations
indicated on the drawings. In other words, if a 30 amp breaker is
shown on the drawing in Space #2, this must be the location it appears
on the submittal schedule. Standard factory arrangements will not be
accepted.
1.2.5.2
Not including all items listed in the above itemized description.
1.2.5.3
Including catalog cut sheets which have several items on a page, and
not clearly identifying by highlighting, underlining or clouding the items
to be reviewed, or crossing out the items which are not applicable.
1.2.5.4
Not including actual manufacturer’s catalog information of proposed
products.
1.2.5.5
Do not include multiple manufacturers for similar products and do not
indicate “or approved equal” statements or “to be determined later”
statements. The products being submitted must be the products
installed.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
The interrupting rating of circuit breakers shall be 10,000 amps for the 120/208 system
and 14,000 amp for 277/480 volt systems. Refer to drawings for higher interrupting rating
requirements. All components and equipment enclosures shall be manufactured by the
same manufacturer. Circuit breakers shall be permitted to be series rated to limit the
available fault current to no more than the above ratings.
2.2
All panels shall be fully bussed. Recessed panel enclosures shall be a maximum of 20"
wide and 5-3/4" deep for all panels 600 amp rated and less.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16–1
2.3
All busses shall be tin-plated aluminum and shall be located in the rear of the panelboard
cabinet. Individual circuit breakers shall be bolt on type and removable from the cabinet
without disturbing the bussing in any way. All panel boards shall contain ground busses.
2.4
Panel covers shall be door in door style, with one lock. Door lock shall allow access to
breakers only. Access to wireways without removal of cover shall be permitted by (non
removable) screws behind the locked door. Panel cover shall be provided with full length
piano hinge. All locks for all panels provided in this project shall be keyed alike.
2.5
Each panel shall have a two-column circuit index card set under glass or glass equivalent
on the inside of the door. Each circuit shall be identified as to use and room or area.
Areas shall be designated by room numbers. Room numbers shown on the drawings
may change and contractor shall verify final room numbers with the architect prior to
project completion.
2.6
Tandem mounted or wafer type breakers are not acceptable.
2.7
Multiple breakers shall have one common trip handle or be internally connected. Handle
ties are not acceptable.
2.8
Breaker arrangements shown in the drawings shall be maintained. The circuit breakers in
panels must match the orientations indicated on the drawings. In other words, if a 30
amp breaker is shown on the drawing in Space #2, this must be the location it appears on
the submittal schedule. Standard factory arrangements will not be accepted.
2.9
Where conductor sizes exceed the standard breaker lug wire range, or where multiple
conductors per phase are required, the panelboard manufacturer shall provide the
breaker with suitable lugs for terminating the specified conductors.
2.10
Acceptable manufacturers are Square D, Eaton, Siemens or General Electric.
2.11
Equipment manufactured by any other manufacturers not specifically listed in Section
2.10 are not considered equal, or approved for use on this project.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
Painting of panelboard covers in finished areas shall be done by the general contractor.
3.2
Provide a spare 3/4" conduit stubbed to an accessible area for each of every three (3)
spares or spaces provided in recessed panel boards.
3.3
All lugs shall be torque tested in the presence of the inspector of record.
Arc Flash and Shock Hazard
3.4
The Contractor is to provide, and submit to the engineer for approval, incident energy
level calculations as determined using the methodologies described in NFPA 70E or
IEEE standard 1584-2002.
3.4.1
All studies shall be performed by “Emerson Electric” (858) 695-9551, MTA
(858) 472-0193, or Terra Power Solutions (858) 380-8170.
Studies
performed by manufactures or other engineering or testing companies
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16–2
must submit qualifications for approval by Johnson Consulting Engineers,
7 days prior to bid for this project.
3.5
A warning label, as specified in the above standard, shall be placed on each switchboard,
panelboard, and safety switch indicating the incident energy levels on the equipment to
warn qualified personnel in accordance with NFPA 70E, section 110.16 Labels shall be
laminated white micarta with black lettering on each. Letters shall be no less than 3/8"
high.
3.6
The incident level calculations for each piece of equipment shall be given to the owner
and maintained on file by the maintenance department
3.7
The design goal is to minimize the incident energy to which a maintenance employee
may be exposed.
END OF SECTION
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16–3
SECTION 26 28 16
DISCONNECTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
Furnish and install all disconnect switches as shown on the drawings and as required by
the CEC.
1.2
Submit manufacturers’ data for all disconnects and fuses.
1.3
1.2.1
Disconnects
1.2.2
Fuses
Common submittal mistakes which will result in the submittals being rejected:
1.3.1
Not including all items listed in the above itemized description.
1.3.2
Including catalog cut sheets which have several items on a page, and not clearly
identifying by highlighting, underlining or clouding the items to be reviewed, or
crossing out the items which are not applicable.
1.3.3
Not including actual manufacturer’s catalog information of proposed products.
1.3.4
Do not include multiple manufacturers for similar products and do not indicate “or
approved equal” statements, or “to be determined later” statements. The
products being submitted must be the products installed.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
Acceptable manufacturers shall be Square D, Cutler Hammer, Siemens or General
Electric.
2.2
Equipment manufactured by any other manufacturers not specifically listed in Section 2.1
are not considered equal, or approved for use on this project.
2.3
All switches shall be heavy-duty type, externally operated, quick-make, quick-break, rated
600 volts or 240 volts as required, with the number of poles and ampacity as noted. All
switches for motors shall be HP rated. Switches shall have NEMA-Type 1 enclosures,
except switches located where exposed to outdoor conditions shall have NEMA Type 3R
enclosure. Switches generally shall be fused except where noted to be non-fused on the
drawings.
2.4
Where fuses are indicated, fuses shall be Bussman or Littlefuse (no known equal).
Fuses shall be current limiting type with time delay characteristics to suit the equipment
served.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
Mount all switches to structure or U-channel support.
cleaned and painted to prevent rust.
U-channel supports shall be
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
DISCONNECTS
26 28 16–1
3.2
Switches shall be accessible with proper clearances in front per CEC 110-16.
3.3
All lugs shall be torque tested in the presence of the inspector of record.
3.4
Arc Flash and Shock Hazard
3.4.1
The contractor is to provide, and submit to the engineer for approval, incident
energy level calculations as determined using the methodologies described in
NFPA 70E or IEEE standard 1584-2002.
3.4.2
A warning label, as specified in the above standard, shall be placed on each
switchboard, panelboard, and safety switch indicating the incident energy levels
on the equipment to warn qualified personnel in accordance with NFPA 70E,
section 110.16 Labels shall be laminated white micarta with black lettering on
each. Letters shall be no less than 3/8" high.
3.4.3
The incident level calculations for each piece of equipment shall be given to the
owner and maintained on file by the maintenance department.
3.4.4
The design goal is to minimize the incident energy to which a maintenance
employee may be exposed and in no case more than 8 cal./cm².
END OF SECTION
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
DISCONNECTS
26 28 16–2
SECTION 26 90 90
TESTING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
Upon completion of the electrical work, the entire installation shall be tested by the
Contractor, and demonstrated to be operating satisfactorily to the Architect, Engineer,
Inspector and Owner.
1.2
All testing and corrections shall be made prior to demonstration of operation to the
Architect, Engineer, Inspector and Owner.
1.3
In addition to the demonstration of operation, the Contractor is also required to review the
content and quality of instructions provided on items demonstrated with the Architect,
Engineer, Inspector and Owner.
PART 2 – EXECUTION
2.1
Wiring shall be tested for continuity, short circuits and/or accidental grounds. All systems
shall be entirely free from “grounds,” “short circuits,” and any or all defects.
2.2
Motors shall be operating in proper rotations, and control devices functioning properly.
Check all motor controllers to determine that properly sized overload devices are
installed, and all other electrical equipment for proper operation.
2.3
Tests and adjustments shall be made prior to acceptance of the electrical installation by
the Architect, and a certificate of inspection and acceptance of the electrical installation
by local inspection authorities shall be provided.
2.4
All equipment or wiring provided which tests prove to be defective or operating improperly
shall be corrected or replaced promptly, at no additional cost to the Owner.
2.5
Test all motor and feeder circuits with a “megger” tester to determine that insulation
values conform to Section 110-20, California Electrical Code (CED). Test reports must
be submitted and approved by the engineer before final acceptance.
2.6
Test all grounding electrode connections to assure a resistance of no more than 10 ohms
is achieved. Augment grounding until the ohmic value stated above is achieved. Provide
certified test results to the Architect, Engineer and Inspector.
END OF SECTION
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
TESTING
26 90 90-1
SECTION 27 01 00
COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS
ARTICLE 1 - SUMMARY
1.1
This Division of the specifications outlines the provisions of the contract work to be
performed as a sub contract under the Division 26 scope of work. Reference the Division
26 Electrical General Provisions for scope of work and general requirements.
1.2
In addition, work in this Division is governed by the provisions of the bidding
requirements, contract forms, general conditions and all sections under Division 1
requirements.
END OF SECTION
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©JCE #15079
COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS
27 01 00–1
SECTION 27 10 00
VOICE / DATA INFRASTRUCTURE
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
Include all labor, equipment and materials necessary for providing a complete networking
infrastructure system as described herein and/or as indicated on the drawings.
1.2
Related specification sections:
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.3
Section 26 01 00 - General Provisions.
Section 26 05 33 - Conduit and Fittings.
Section 26 05 19 - Conductors.
Section 26 05 34 – Outlet and Junction Boxes.
Approved products and all components shall be manufactured by one of the approved
manufactures, and the installing contractor must have the accompanying certification
from the product manufacturer for installation of a “Warranted System: as required by
each manufacturer and as indicated in these specifications.
The Acceptable
manufacturers are:
1.3.1
AMP Inc.
1.3.1.1 Installing contractor must be AMP ND&I certified to install this system.
1.3.2
KRONE
1.3.2.1 Installing contractor must be KRONE TSC certified to install this system.
1.3.3
Leviton / Superior Essex.
1.3.3.1 Installing contractor must be LEVITON CCS LEVEL III certified to install
this system.
1.3.4
SYSTIMAX
1.3.4.1 Installing contractor must be SCS Systimax certified to install this
system.
1.3.5
Systems or components as manufactured by Hitachi or any other manufacturer’s
which are not specifically listed, are not approved for use on this project.
Specified system warranties are to be established between the component
manufacturers and the owner, warranties between the cable manufacturer or
installing contractor and the owner are not considered equal.
1.3.6
Installing contractor qualifications: Firms and their personnel must be regularly
engaged in the installation of data networking cabling and equipment for systems
of similar type and scope. The contractor must have a full service office able to
respond to emergency callouts during the warranty period. The contractor must
also provide complete installation of all wiring and devices or equipment.
Subcontracts with Division 26 contractors or other warranted or non-warranted
contractors for supervised installation of any part of this system is not approved.
All conduit and standard back boxes will be furnished and installed by the
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
VOICE / DATA INFRASTRUCTURE
27 10 00–1
Division 26 contractor. Specialty boxes will be furnished by the equipment
supplier and installed by the Division 26 contractor.
1.3.7
Equipment qualifications: It is the intent of these specifications that each bidder
provide all hardware, components and installation services that are necessary to
ensure a fully operational Category-6 wiring system including warranties,
proposed in the EIA/TIA Category-6 and the ISO Class E drafts.
1.3.8
Warranty shall be a full “Performance Warranty” installed by a “Certified
Contractor” as specified by one of the approved manufacturer’s A
“Component Warranty” will not be considered equal. All components, labor,
and 'Link Performance Criteria" shall be warranted by one of the approved
manufacturers. Warranty shall be to the customer for 15-years (some warranty
programs may be greater, this is a minimum requirement) after Customer
acceptance and sign-off of the completed system. The contractor must provide
documentation from one of the approved manufacturers indicating their
qualifications for installation of this system in compliance with the
manufacturers warranty requirements as a warranted contractor.
1.4
In order to ensure project cohesion, a single point of contact is required to provide a
“TURNKEY” solution. The work covered under this section of the specification consists
of furnishing all labor; conduits, boxes and trenching; cabling; equipment; supplies;
materials, and training. The Contractor will perform all operations necessary for the
“TURNKEY” and fully completed installation in accordance with the specifications herein.
As such, the successful contractor must be factory trained on all aspects of system
hardware. The successful Contractor shall be a California licensed C7 or C10 premise
wiring contractor as defined in this specification. Subcontractors may not be utilized in
the implementation of the plant wiring installation or certification process. The contractor
shall provide a licensed, qualified Division 26 contractor for installation of all conduits,
outlet and junction boxes, trenching and pull box installations.
1.5
The drawings indicate a schematic routing of cables above ceilings. The Contractor shall
field-verify the most appropriate routing of all above-ceiling cable prior to bid. Where
cables penetrate through walls a conduit sleeve shall be provided. Where cables pass
through fire rated walls, the conduit sleeve shall be sealed to maintain the rating of
the wall assembly.
1.6
Phase I Submittal shall be made within (20) working days after the award of the
contract by the District. This submittal shall include the following:
1.6.1
Complete bills of quantities, including all materials, components, devices, and
equipment required for this work. The bills of quantities shall be tabulated
respective of each and every system as specified, and shall contain the following
information for each Section listed:
1.6.1.1 Description and quantity of each item.
1.6.1.2 Manufacturer's Name and Model Number.
1.6.1.3 Manufacturer's Specification Sheet.
1.6.2
1.7
Include with submittals all warranty information and a description of support and
maintenance services to be provided. Also include all licenses and maintenance
agreements required for continued operation of the equipment.
Phase II submittal shall be provided within (20) working days after the approval of the
Phase I submittals and prior to any fabrication or field conduit installations. All shop
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
VOICE / DATA INFRASTRUCTURE
©
JCE #15079
27 10 00–2
drawings shall be engineered and drawn on a CAD System. Each submission shall
include 'D' or ’E’ size print copies to match the contract drawings, and (1) Phase II
submittals drawings shall include the following.
1.8
1.9
1.7.1
MDF or IDF equipment or rack elevations will be required to be provided
including, cable routing and position of all components.
1.7.2
Provide labeling plan which identifies the proposed scheme for identifying all
components including Racks, patch panels (fiber and copper), ports and cables
(fiber and copper).
Common submittal mistakes which will result in submittals being rejected:
1.8.1
Not including the qualifications of the installing contractor.
1.8.2
Not including all items listed in the above itemized description.
1.8.3
Including catalog cut sheets which have several items on a page, and not clearly
identifying by highlighting, underlining or clouding the items to be reviewed, or
crossing out the items which are not applicable.
1.8.4
Not including actual manufacturer’s catalog information of proposed products.
1.8.5
Do not include multiple manufacturers for similar products and do not indicate “or
approved equal” statements, or “to be determined later” statements. The
products being submitted must be the products installed.
The contractor shall make a written request directly to Johnson Consulting Engineers for
electronic drawing files. As a part of the written request, please include the following
information:
1.9.1
Clearly indicate each drawing sheet needed (i.e., E1.1, E2.1, etc.).
1.9.2
Identify the name, phone number, mailing address and e-mail address of the
person to receive the files.
1.9.3
Provide written confirmation and agreement with the requirements described for
payment of computer files, as described below.
1.9.4
Detail or riser diagram sheets, or any other drawings other than floor plans or site
plans, will not be made available to the contractor.
1.9.5
Files will only be provided in the AutoCAD format in which they were created
(i.e., version 14 or version 2000i).
1.9.6
Requests for files will be processed as soon as possible; a minimum of 7 working
days should be the normal processing time. The contractor shall be completely
responsible for requesting the files in time for their use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Equipment racks have been detailed on the drawings and additional component
information requirements have been described in the IDF products sections. The
following is a list of approved manufacturers for each type of rack system.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
VOICE / DATA INFRASTRUCTURE
27 10 00–3
2.1.1
Alternate equipment manufacturers other than those indicated will not be
reviewed or approved for use on this project.
2.1.2
(Enclosed Wall Mount) shall be manufactured by B-Line or Middle Atlantic.
Reference drawing details and specification for complete requirements.
Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF)
2.2
The Intermediate Distribution Frame shall be a secondary wiring and equipment location
for the data networking system. The contractor shall include the following items at this
location.
2.2.1
Provide 8'-0" high x 3/4" thick, as detailed on drawings, flame resistant plywood
mounting backboard, painted with fire resistant paint white or color to match.
Contractor shall provide minimum one side finish grade plywood. Backboard
shall be mounted with finish side out, regardless of location of fire rating stamp.
2.2.2
Fiber optic termination equipment (rack mounted), including all associated
installation hardware for fiber feed cables. The equipment must have sufficient
number of ports to connect all fibers in every cable terminated at this location.
2.2.3
Category-6 Modular Patch Panel Owner furnished and installed.
2.2.4
Fiber optic termination equipment (rack mounted), including all associated
installation hardware for fiber optic connections for the telephone switch remote
node.
2.2.5
Provide equipment mounting rack or enclosure as detailed in the drawings.
Provide ladder rack bracing at top of rack back to wall and seismic bolting to floor
and wall as shown on detail drawings. Rack shall be furnished with the following
accessories:
2.2.5.1
(1) Grounding kit, connect grounding conductor to nearest ground buss
bar.
2.2.5.2 Provide full length double-sided vertical wire managers, on each side of
each rack section, or between racks, and horizontal wire managers
between each patch panel.
In wall-mounted cabinets, provide
combination vertical/horizontal managers with vertical rings. Managers
for wall-mounted cabinets shall be no more than 1RU in height and rings
no more than 2" in depth. Provide (4) spare horizontal managers per
rack section.
2.2.5.3 (1) Rack mounted surge arrest style power strip “APC” # NET9RM with
(9) outlets and (1) always on outlet, guarded master on-off switch.
Provide with minimum 15-foot cord.
2.2.6
Additional items required at each IDF closet are as follows:
2.2.6.1 Fiber patch cords shall be provided and connected to the electronics by
others.
2.3
Campus Indoor/Outdoor Fiber Optic Feed Cable
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
VOICE / DATA INFRASTRUCTURE
27 10 00–4
2.3.1
Provide one continuous fiber optic cable routed from the Main Distribution Frame
fiber patch panel to each Intermediate Distribution Frame fiber patch panel,
and/or other locations as shown on the drawings.
2.3.2
Fiber optic cable shall be rated for indoor/outdoor applications. Construction shall
consist of; all dielectric, stranded loose tube with central strength member, no
more than six strands per tube, flame retardant PVC or PE jacket, rated OFNR,
water blocking gel in tubes or dry water-blocking compound, and blank fillers as
required. Central tube type fiber will not be considered equal.
2.3.3
Fiber optic feeds shown as composite type may be run as separately jacketed
cables. Cables shown as separate runs on the drawings may not be combined
together.
2.3.4
Cable shall contain one or all types of fibers listed below:
2.3.4.1 Multimode 50/125 micron strands, minimum (laser-optimized grade) for
dual mode operation at 850 nm and 1300 nm wave lengths. Maximum
attenuation at 3.5dB/km @ 850nm and 1.5dB/km @ 1300nm. Quantity
of fibers as per detail drawings. Minimum gigabit ethernet distance
guarantee of 900 meters @ 850nm and 550 meters @ 1300nm.
Minimum 10 gigabit ethernet distance guarantee of 300 meters @
850nm. Aerial rated
2.3.4.2 Single mode 8.3/125 micron strands, minimum High Performance grade
for dual mode operation at 1310 nm and 1550 nm wave lengths.
Maximum attenuation at 0.5dB/km @ 1310nm and 0.5dB/km @
1550nm. Quantity of fibers as per detail drawings. Aerial rated
2.3.4.3 Refer to drawings for cable types required. Refer to acceptable cables
section for additional information and approved manufacturers.
2.3.5
Each fiber optic cable shall contain the quantity of strands of optical fibers as
detailed on the drawings. A pull string shall be placed with all fiber cable at
the time of installation. Outdoor rated fiber runs in excess of 150 feet shall
be provided with a minimum 1/4" pull rope for future access. An empty and
spare site conduits shall be provided with minimum 1/4" pull rope.
2.3.6
All fibers in a multi-fiber cable shall be fully operational within the required
performance characteristics. If any individual fiber does not meet the minimum
standards, the entire cable must be replaced, end to end, including connectors,
without any additional expense to the customer.
2.3.7
Acceptable cables shall be:
AMP Inc.
Corning
Krone
Superior Essex
—
—
—
—
OM4 series
OM4 series
OM4 series
OM4 series
Above glass types are an example of product names per manufacturer.
Confirm requirements for indoor/outdoor fiber cable with riser drawings
and site plans. Part numbers for composite style cable will vary greatly. Confirm
part numbers with manufacturer.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
VOICE / DATA INFRASTRUCTURE
27 10 00–5
2.3.8
All indoor rated fiber shall be installed in riser rated innerduct, when not installed
in conduit, a minimum of 1" in diameter. A pull string shall be placed with all fiber
cable at the time of installation. Indoor rated fiber runs in excess of 150 feet shall
be provided with a minimum 1/4" pull rope for future access upon completion of
the project. An empty and spare site conduits shall be provided with
minimum 1/4" pull rope.
2.3.9
All fibers in a multi-fiber cable shall be fully operational within the required
performance characteristics. If any individual fiber does not meet the minimum
standards, the entire cable must be replaced, end to end, including connectors,
without any additional expense to the customer.
2.3.10 Acceptable cables shall be:
AMP Inc.
Avaya
Berk-Tek
Uniprise
Corning
Krone
Mohawk
NORDX/CDT
Superior Essex
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
# XG 50/125 Series
# Laser Speed 300
# GIGALITE 10
# Laser Core 300, Type 5L
# INFINICOR SXT
# 50/125Ultra Mode
# Advanced Lite 2000
# M9C811 Series
# TERAGAIN 10G
Above glass types are an example of product names per manufacturer.
Confirm requirements for indoor fiber cable with riser drawings and site
plans. Part numbers for composite style cable will vary greatly. Confirm part
numbers with manufacturer.
2.4
Data Station Cable
2.4.1
All building UTP cabling will be owner furnished and installed
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.1
Pull strings will be provided with all cable runs including but not limited to; conduit
stub ups, conduit sleeves, cable trays, open wiring routes, innerduct, and point-topoint conduits. Pull strings shall be free from cable bundles in open wiring routes.
Pull strings shall not be substituted for pull ropes.
3.2
Velcro cable management straps are required on the rear of the equipment racks and on
the patch cords within the vertical cable managers. Straps shall be a maximum of 12"
apart.
3.3
Every fiber in every fiber optic cable must be terminated at both ends on a fiber patch
panel in the IDF closet or on a faceplate in the classroom location. Termination shall be
accomplished using Duplex SC type connectors with a long strain relief boot, except for
fiber ran to station locations where a short boot shall be used.
3.4
All SC connectors shall be of the same manufacture to ensure compatibility. Polarity of
fiber strands must be observed at all times.
3.5
Labeling
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
VOICE / DATA INFRASTRUCTURE
27 10 00–6
3.5.1
Each cable run shall be permanently labeled at each end with a unique
sequential number which corresponds to a similar number provided for each data
outlet and punch down point. A printed label shall be placed at each of the
following locations;
3.5.1.1 On the cable at the rear of the patch panel or termination block.
Requires the use of a self laminating wrap around label. Brady Label
self laminating 1.2" by 1.5" wrap around label Part # 29689 or equal.
3.5.1.2 On each cable in the j-box behind the faceplate location. Requires the
use of a self laminating wrap around label. Brady Label self laminating
1.2" by 1.5" wrap around label Part # 29689 or equal.
3.5.1.3 On the face of the patch panel, provide a 3/4" by 3/4" label with a letter
or number identifying the patch panel designation.
3.5.1.4 On the face of the faceplate in the label holder window.
3.5.2
Hand written labels are not permitted. Where cable ID includes room number
identification the contractor shall obtain written verification of actual room
numbers prior to beginning labeling (numbers on plans do not always match
actual room numbers). Cable pulling cross reference lists will not be accepted
with final documentation.
3.5.3
Each patch panel port shall be identified with a unique sequential labeling
scheme. Port identification labeling pattern shall be consistent throughout the
project.
3.5.4
All faceplates shall be identified with permanent printed labels. Labels must not
be subject to removal by incidental contact. Contractor shall be responsible
for replacing defective labeling for a period of one year from date of final
sign-off of project.
3.5.5
All fiber optic feed cables shall be identified with a permanent, water resistant,
printed labels. Labeling information shall include closet identifications, quantity of
conductors (UTP) or strands (fiber) and house pair designations (UTP).
3.5.6
Labeling will follow recommended EIA/TIA standards or as requested by the
customer. Contractor will confirm labeling pattern prior to final identification or
testing. All test results will be identified by the final labeling scheme.
3.5.7
All fiber optic cables and/or innerduct shall be tagged with fiber optic warning
tags in every manhole or pullbox. Fiber warning tags shall also be placed at each
end of the cable in the termination closets in clear view. A minimum of (3) tags
are required at each end. Fiber warning tags shall be placed on fiber optic cable
and/or innerduct routed through open ceiling environments at increments no less
than 15 feet apart.
3.6
Where open wiring cables are run through the ceiling space (only permitted where
specifically noted on the drawings), the wire shall be bundled together and supported
above the ceiling.
3.7
All cables must be fastened to the building structure via “j-hooks” or an approved
Category 6 suspension system, and not directly in contact with ceiling system. For “j-
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
VOICE / DATA INFRASTRUCTURE
27 10 00–7
hooks” maximum fill capacity is as follows: 1-5/16" hooks – 35 cables; 2" hooks - 60
cables; 4" hooks - 120 cables. For quantities beyond 120 cables use a sling support
system such as “Erico Cable Cat” or equal. Maximum fill capacity 200 cables. D-rings,
“Caddy #WMX cable hangar”, “Caddy Bridle Rings”, drive rings or any other type
of wire ring support is not allowed.
3.8
Where cables pass through a fire-resistant portion of the structure, conduit sleeves shall
be provided to maintain the rating of the wall penetrated. Sealing of all penetrations with
an approved fire barrier is required. Conduits and sleeves must remain accessible for
future use. Permanent sealants may not be used to seal sleeves and conduits.
3.9
Fiber optic cables connecting to equipment racks shall be installed with not less than 20
feet of slack cable between the rack and the terminal backboard. See drawings for fiber
optic service loop requirements.
3.10
The minimum bending radius for all cables and the maximum pulling tension shall not
exceed manufacturer's recommendations.
3.11
Cables installed in manholes and pullboxes on terminal backboards shall be installed on
wall mounted cable support racks.
3.12
Provide a full 360 degree loop of cable around manhole and pullbox interiors.
3.13
Cable pulling shall use a split mesh grip over the cable jacket. Connection directly to
optical fibers and copper wire conductors shall not occur.
3.14
When pulled through conduits, cable pulling lubricants shall be continuously applied to all
cables and be specifically approved by the manufacturer.
3.15
Where cables are pulled through or pulled from a center of run, pull without splices or
terminations, lead out the cables at all manholes, pullboxes, and conduits, taking care to
feed them in again by hand for the next run.
3.16
For each cable pull where a cable direction change is required, flexible feed-in tubes,
pullout devices, multi-segmented sheaves, etc., shall be used to ensure proper cable
pulling tensions and side wall pressures. Cables shall not be pulled directly around a
short right angle bend. Any device or surface the cable comes in contact with when
under pull-in tension shall have a minimum radius 50% greater than the final specified
minimum installed cable bending radius. The maximum possible size radius sheaves and
feed-in tubes, usable in the available working space, shall be provided in all situations, to
ensure the minimum possible cable sidewall pulling pressure. Do not use devices with
multi-segment "roller" type sheaves.
3.17
When pulling cable through conduit, cables shall be pulled straight into or out of the
raceway without bends at the raceway entrance or exit. Pull in cable from the end having
the sharpest bend (i.e., bend shall be closest to the reel.) Keep pulling tension to
minimum by liberal use of lubricant, hand turning of reel, and slack feeding of cable into
duct entrance. Employ not less than one man at reel and one at manhole or pullbox
during this operation. Cables shall be pulled directly from cable reels.
3.18
All cables shall be new and extend continuous from each MDF or IDF backboard or rack
to all voice/data outlets or other equipment locations.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
VOICE / DATA INFRASTRUCTURE
27 10 00–8
3.19
Where cables are not installed in a conduit or other raceway system, they shall not be
routed parallel with other line voltage equipment or wiring (120 volt and above) within 36"
or within 12" of line voltage equipment or wiring where crossing. Where Flooded
Enhanced Category-5 cables or outdoor rated fiber optic cables are routed exposed
through ceilings for more than 50'-0", install in innerduct or EMT conduit system.
PART 4 - TESTING
4.1
Multimode fiber optic cables shall be tested bi-directionally at 850nm and 1300nm.
Single mode fiber optic cable shall be tested bi-directionally at 1310nm and 1550nm. All
fiber strands shall be tested with a power meter and light source as well as an OTDR
(Optical Time Domain Reflectometer). OTDR fiber tests for runs under 100 meters are
not required. All fiber test results shall contain final source and destination information
that matches IDF or MDF labeling shown on drawings. Fiber test results shall be
submitted as hard copy and on floppy disk in Microsoft Excel format.
4.2
Test procedures shall comply with EIA/TIA 526-14 Method B. Test results shall meet the
minimum following criteria:
4.2.1
Fiber optic test results shall not exceed 2db attenuation loss in addition to
inherent loss published by manufacturer tested at minimum 2000 Mhz for 850nm
and 500 Mhz for 1300nm for the fiber optic cable.
4.2.2
Test all voice/data cables minimum Category-6 UTP cable to test results for “Link
Testing” requirements @ 250 Mhz per current EIA/TIA draft requirements. Any
cables which do not meet these minimum requirements shall be replaced or
repaired at no cost to the customer.
4.3
End to end attenuation termination points measure the power loss between end points
from both directions.
4.4
End to end attenuation testing shall be performed with a temporary test jumper cable at
each end of the installed fiber cable. The test jumper shall be the same size as the
installed cable. The measured attenuation of the test jumpers, test connectors, and test
interconnection sleeve between the two test jumpers shall be less than 1dB as calibrated
at the time of the test at indicated wave lengths and frequencies.
4.5
Provide (3) hard bound copies of “E-size” drawings and (1) disk copy in AutoCAD 14 or
2000 format copy of floor plan drawings of each building. These drawings shall include
all outlet locations, major cable routes and outlet and cable identification numbers.
Provide detailed elevations of each MDF or IDF locating all equipment and connections.
END OF SECTION
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
VOICE / DATA INFRASTRUCTURE
27 10 00–9
SECTION 28 01 00
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
GENERAL PROVISIONS
ARTICLE 1 - SUMMARY
1.1
This Division of the specifications outlines the provisions of the contract work to be
performed as a sub contract under the Division 26 scope of work. Reference the Division
26 Electrical General Provisions for scope of work and general requirements.
1.2
In addition, work in this Division is governed by the provisions of the bidding
requirements, contract forms, general conditions and all sections under Division 1
requirements.
END OF SECTION
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©JCE #15079
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS
28 01 00–1
SECTION 28 30 00
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
Work Included:
1.1.1
1.2
Related Work:
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.3
Furnish and install all equipment, accessories, and materials in accordance with
these specifications and drawings to provide a complete and operating fire alarm
system.
Division 26 01 00: Electrical General Provisions
Division 26 05 33: Conduit and Fittings
Division 26 05 34: Outlet and Junction Boxes
The equipment and installation shall comply with the current applicable provisions of the
following standards:
NFPA 72-2013. . . . . . .
CBC - 2013. . . . . . . . . .
CEC - 2013. . . . . . . . . .
CFC - 2013. . . . . . . . . .
1.4
National Fire Alarm Code with California Amendments.
California Building Code (CBC), Part 2, Title 24, CCR.
California Electrical Code, (CEC), Part 3, Title 24, CCR.
California Fire Code (CFC), Part 9, Title 24, CCR.
The system and all components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use
in Fire Protective Signaling Systems under the following standards as applicable:
UL 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes.
UL 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinets and Boxes.
UL 268 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 268A . . . . . . . . . . . . Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications
UL 346 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 464 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audible Signaling Appliances.
UL 521. . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 864 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 1481. . . . . . . . . . . . Power supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 1971. . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual Signaling Appliances.
1.5
Only Fire Alarm Control Panel Equipment and Peripheral Field Devices have been shown
on the Contract Bid Single Line Block Diagram. Specific and complete wiring between
Control Equipment and Peripheral Equipment has been deleted for clarity.
1.6
Submittal shall be made in accordance with Division 26 01 00 – Shop Drawings and
Submittals. This submittal shall include the following:
1.6.1
Complete bills of quantities, including all materials, components, devices, and
equipment required for this work. The bills of quantities shall be tabulated
respective of each and every system as specified, and shall contain the following
information for each item listed:
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
28 30 00–1
1.6.1.1
1.6.1.2
1.6.1.3
1.6.1.4
1.6.1.5
1.6.1.6
1.6.1.7
1.7
Quantity of each type of equipment item.
Description of each item.
Manufacturer's Name and Model Number.
Manufacturer's Specification Sheet.
California State Fire Marshall Listing Sheets for all components.
Equipment items which have individual components, will require that
all component parts be listed individually.
Letter indicating the contractor’s intent to comply with Phase II
submittal drawings.
Phase II Submittal shall be provided within (20) working days after the approval of the
Phase I submittals and prior to any fabrication or field conduit installations. All shop
drawings shall be engineered and drawn on a CAD System. Each submission shall
include 'D' or ’E’ size print copies to match the contract drawings, and one (1) data disk
copy with files in a AutoCAD 2000i or 2004 format . Contractor shall make the request for
drawings in writing directly to Johnson Consulting Engineers, confirmation of the request
and a release form will be forwarded to the contractor to include a signed copy with
payment prior to release of files. Detail or riser diagram sheets or any other drawings
other than floor or site plans, will not be made available to the contractor.
1.7.1
Provide complete shop drawings to include the following:
1.7.1.1
Complete floor plans, at scale of contract documents, showing the
locations throughout the project of all receptacles, conduits,
wireways, tray, pullboxes, junction boxes, equipment racks, and other
devices.
1.7.1.2
Point to point wiring diagrams showing wiring from panel terminals to
each device.
1.7.1.3
Scaled floor plans indicating the location of devices, conduit runs,
types, and number of conductors.
1.7.1.4
Riser diagram indicating all wiring and circuits.
1.7.1.5
Current State Fire Marshal listing sheets for all components and
devices.
1.7.1.6
Provide battery power supply calculations, indicate point of power
supply connection, means of disconnect, over-current protection, etc.
for each panel.
1.7.1.7
Provide detailed information on conductors to be used-manufacturer,
type, size, insulation, etc.
1.7.1.8
Provide voltage drop calculations for all conductor run is from each
panel (i.e., main FACP, remotes, power extenders, etc.) for each
panel.
1.7.1.9
Provide written sequence of system operation matrix.
1.7.1.10
Provide list of zones. (Every device that is addressable.)
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
28 30 00–2
1.7.1.11
1.8
Provide detailed drawing for annunciator panel indicating all zones
and initiating devices.
Common submittal mistakes which will result in submittals being rejected:
1.8.1
Not including the qualifications of the installing contractor.
1.8.2
Not including all items listed in the above itemized description.
1.8.3
Including catalog cut sheets which have several items on a page, and not clearly
identifying by highlighting, underlining or clouding the items to be reviewed, or
crossing out the items which are not applicable.
1.8.4
Not including actual manufacturer’s catalog information of proposed products.
1.8.5
Do not include multiple manufacturers for similar products and do not indicate “or
approved equal” statements, or “to be determined later” statements. The
products being submitted must be the products installed.
1.9
All equipment and material shall be new and unused, and listed by Underwriter's
Laboratories for the specific intended purpose. All control panel components and field
peripherals shall be designed for continuous duty without degradation of function or
performance. All equipment covered by this specification or noted on Installation.
Drawings shall be equipment suited for the application and shall be provided by a single
manufacturer or be recognized and UL listed as compatible by both manufacturers.
1.10
It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure proper specification adherence for
system operation, final connection, test, turnover, warranty compliance, and after-market
service. The distributor of the equipment specified must be factory-trained and certified.
1.11
Basic System Functional Operation, upon operation of any automatic, manual or other
initiation device the following shall occur:
1.11.1 The system alarm LED shall flash.
1.11.2 A local piezo electric signal in the control panel shall sound.
1.11.3 A backlit 80 character LCD display shall indicate all information associated with
the fire alarm condition, including the alarm point and its location within the
protected premises.
1.11.4 History storage equipment shall log the information associated with each new fire
alarm control panel condition, along with time and date of occurrence.
1.11.5 All system output programs assigned via control by event equations to be
activated by the particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associated
system outputs (alarm notification appliances and/or relays) shall be activated.
1.11.6 LED display and audible signaling at the remote annunciator indicating building,
fire zone, and type of device.
1.11.7 Automatic retransmission to a UL central station for fire department notification.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
28 30 00–3
1.11.8 Automatic shut down of air conditioning units and/or smoke dampers furnished
with duct detectors. Each building shall shut down all A/C units and dampers
within that building as one zone.
1.12
All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model. The
materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally
recognized approval agency for use as part of a protective signaling system, meeting the
NFPA 72, 2013 Edition with California State Amendments.
1.13
All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring
diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning system
installation.
1.14
All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held
firmly in place. Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load.
1.15
All wiring shall be installed in a conduit system.
1.16
The contractor shall provide as a part of this contract additional control modules, heat
detectors, smoke detectors, duct detectors, manual pull stations, strobes, mini-horns and
exterior horn devices etc., to equal 10% of the total quantity of devices shown on the
drawings, or a minimum of three (3) for each type, whichever is greater. Installation of
conduit, boxes and wiring of these devices shall be included, and required locations
coordinated with CSFM final approved shop drawings. Any devices not required to be
included during construction shall be delivered to the District at the completion of the
project. The quantities of these devices shall be listed as a part of the Phase I
submittals.
1.17
The installing contractor shall provide a copy of current documentation, indicating that the
contractor installing the fire alarm systems or devices and wiring, is certified by
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) in its product directories under the listing category
"PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SERVICES - LOCAL, AUXILIARY, REMOTE STATION,
AND PROPRIETARY.” The contractor shall be certified by the manufacturer to install
and program the system. The contractor must also provide complete installation of all
wiring and equipment, and software programming. Supervised installation of the wiring,
devices and/or any software programming shall not be permitted.
1.17.1 The installing contractor must also be an “authorized dealer” by the equipment
manufacturer, and must have completed all required training prior to the bid of
this project.
1.17.2 The fire alarm system installation shall be warranted by the manufacturer’s
representative.
1.17.3 The Contractor shall have a current California C-10 or C-7 Contractor’s License,
and all individuals working on this project shall have passed the Department of
Industrial Relations Division of Apprenticeship Standards – “Fire / Life Safety
Certification Program.”
1.17.4 The installing contractor shall provide, at the time of submittal, a letter of intent to
provide an extended service warranty. This warranty shall extend for a total of
three (3) years, starting at the completion, testing, and training of this project.
The service warranty shall cover all material and labor to keep operational all
system devices installed under this project, and shall include two (2) complete
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
©
JCE #15079
28 30 00–4
U.L. system’s tests and cleaning of all devices at year two (2) and year three (3)
of the warranty. Routine cleaning of devices, other than at the two (2) specified
U.L. system’s testing periods, will not be included as a part of this warranty.
1.17.5 The installing contractor shall provide, at the time of submittal, a letter indicating
that the installation crew for this project meets the following NICET certifications:
1.17.5.1
25% of the installing field personnel must have completed NICET
Level 2 Certification.
1.17.5.2
One of the installing field personnel and /or supervisor must have
completed NICET Level 3 Certification.
1.17.5.3
Contractor shop drawings shall be signed by an individual who has
completed NICET Level 4 Certification.
1.18
All conduit and standard backboxes will be furnished and installed by the Division 26
Contractor. Specialty boxes will be furnished by the equipment supplier to be installed by
the Division 26 Contractor.
1.19
Equipment and materials shall be the standard product of Simplex to match the existing
system
Alternate equipment as manufactured by any other manufacturer not specifically listed
above will not be approved for use on this project. D.S.A approved drawings are
included as a part of the drawing set
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Main Fire Alarm Control Panel
2.1.1
Fire alarm control panel Simplex
2.1.2
The system shall be controlled and supervised by a microprocessor based
monitoring fire alarm control panel. The systems shall be addressable, field
configurable, programmable and editable. The system shall continuously scan
devices for change of status. Each device shall have its own unique address, but
shall also be grouped by building as a separate zone for remote annunciation
and alarm report purposes.
2.1.3
The system shall be provided with a networking card and software and modem to
communicate with the District-wide diagnostic and annunciation network.
2.1.4
The fire alarm control panel shall be housed in a lockable, code gauge steel
cabinet with 80 character LCD display, master controller operators panel,
Indicating lamps, silence switch and reset switch mounted on cabinet front. The
fire alarm control panel shall be physically and visually located in the general
office for monitoring by staff, and shall sound the “Temporal Pattern” in all zones.
Signal duration shall be field programmable and initially set at three minutes.
Provide all control modules, synchronous modules, etc., to provide a complete
working system per all codes that apply.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
28 30 00–5
2.1.5
The fire alarm control panel shall come with standardized software for on-site
customization of the system. The unit shall be capable of providing a 600-event
historical log with zone or point selectable alarm verification.
2.1.6
The unit shall support 127 addressable points per module and one output point,
SPST contact per zone. Provide the number of modules necessary to control
and supervise fire alarm devices as shown on the Drawings, as well as to provide
25% spare capacity.
2.1.7
The fire alarm control panel shall be capable of providing a walk test.
2.2
The power feed for the FACP shall be 3-wire, 120volt, AC, single phase (20A circuit)
permanently labeled “FIRE ALARM CONTROL POWER”, terminating at the master fire
alarm control and supervisory panel. The label shall be red with 1/4” high white lettering.
The source circuit breaker must be provided with a lock-on device.
2.3
In addition to the AC circuit, the panel shall be equipped with a DC battery to activate an
audible alarm and pilot light in case of a power failure on the AC circuit.
2.4
Batteries must drive signaling devices per current requirements of California State Fire
Marshal. Battery calculations are required as part of the submittal.
2.5
The master fire alarm panel shall be equipped with a manual pull lever type, supervised
report station.
2.6
With the exception of the manually operated report station required at the master fire
alarm panel and large assembly areas, the remainder of the school facility shall be
equipped with approved, electronically supervised, automatic fire detection devices, such
that every room, space, including concealed spaces, such as the attic spaces above
ceilings, etc., is provided with approved coverage.
2.7
Automatic fire detection devices shall be addressable analog smoke and heat detectors.
Where used, heat detectors shall be fixed temperature x-rate of rise, fixed at 135ΕF and
a 15ΕF/min rate of rise. In janitor rooms equipped with kilns, devices shall be fixed at
170ΕF.
2.8
MANUAL FIRE ALARM STATIONS shall be addressable test-reset lock in order that they
may be tested, and so designed that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be
restored to normal, except by use of a key. An operated station shall automatically
condition itself so as to be visually detected, as operated, at a minimum distance of 100
feet, front or side. Manual stations shall be constructed of die-formed, satin-finished
aluminum, with operating directions provided on the cover in depressed red letters. The
word FIRE shall appear on each side of the stations in depressed letters, 1/2-inch in size
or larger. Stations shall be suitable for semi-flush mounting on a standard single-gang
box or switch plate, and shall be provided with a terminal block for connection of fire
alarm system wiring. Manual pull stations must comply with CBC sections 11B-309 and
11B-403.
2.9
HORN / STROBE DEVICE shall be of the semi-flush type designed for mounting to a
standard four-inch square electrical outlet box. Each device shall be provided with a
semi-flush accessory plate. Exterior horns shall be weatherproof. The strobe unit shall
have a meantime between failure (MTBF) of 1,000 hours or greater. The strobe section
shall have a minimum flash rate of approximately one flash per second, with candela
rating as per UL standard 1971. Housing shall be white.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
28 30 00–6
2.9.1
2.10
In areas containing two or more audible devices, or three or more visual devices,
these devices shall be synchronized, Per NFPA 72, Chapter 6 California
Amendments (2013).
STROBES. The strobe unit shall have a meantime between failure (MTBF) of 1,000
hours or greater. The strobe section shall have a minimum flash rate of approximately
one flash per second, with candela rating as per UL standard 1971. Housing shall be
white.
2.10.1 In areas containing two or more audible devices, or three or more visual devices,
these devices shall be synchronized, per NFPA 72, Chapter 6 California
Amendments (2013).
2.10.2 Maximum pulse duration to be 0.20 of a second with an ADAAG 4.28.3(3).
Visual alarms maximum duty cycle of 40%.
2.10.3 Capable of providing minimum candela. Intensity as shown on plans (effective
strength measured at the source).
2.10.4 The flash rate to be a minimum of 1.Hz and a maximum of 3 Hz.
2.11
HEAT DETECTOR DEVICES shall be addressable, fixed temperature x rate of rise, fixed
at 135ΕF and a 15ΕF/min rate of rise. In janitor rooms equipped with kilns, devices shall
be fixed at 170ΕF.
2.12
SMOKE DETECTOR DEVICES shall be analog addressable, photo-electric.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
All wiring shall be (min) #18 AWG copper or as noted on drawings. All underground
conductors shall be UL wet location rated for use in wet locations, West Penn “Aquaseal”
or equal. There shall be no splices in underground handholes or vaults. A multiconductor cable rated for use in wet locations will also be acceptable. It must be labeled
“FIRE ALARM” in all pull boxes, using a water-tight labeling system.
3.2
Interior, dry location wiring for low voltage initiating circuits shall be #18 AWG copper,
twisted shielded pair minimum, signaling circuits shall be No. 14 AWG minimum, and
wiring for 120 volt circuits shall be No. 12 AWG minimum. All wiring shall be color
coded, solid copper conductor. Use of power limited cable shall be restricted to controls
listed for this purpose. Single conductors shall be type THHN/THWN-2 insulated copper.
3.3
Wire markers shall be provided for each wire connected to equipment. The marker shall
be of the taped bank type, of permanent material, and shall be suitable and permanently
stamped with the proper identification. The markers shall be attached in a manner that
will not permit accidental detachment. Changing of wire colors within circuits shall be
unacceptable.
3.4
A terminal cabinet shall be installed in the electric room for the fire alarm systems at each
building. All fire alarm wiring shall terminate on UL approved strips in this terminal
cabinet. All wiring shall be labeled at each termination strip. Wiring shall be configured
such that all end-of-line resistors will be installed at the terminal cabinet.
3.5
Fire Sprinkler Activation detecting System(s) shall each be indicated on a separate zone
in the fire alarm control panel.
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
28 30 00–7
3.6
Fire Alarm Control Panel and all other equipment shall be mounted with the center of all
operable reset buttons, located a maximum of 48" front approach / 54" side approach
above floor level.
3.7
Contractor shall provide complete wiring between all equipment.
3.8
The Fire Alarm/Life Safety Installation shall comply fully with all Local, State and National
Codes, and the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) DSA.
3.9
The Fire Alarm Control Panel and power supply shall be connected to a separate
dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20 amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the main
Power Distribution Panel as FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT.
3.10
The Control Panel Cabinet shall be grounded securely to a power system ground
conductor. Provide a 1/2-inch conduit and 1#12 grounding conductor to the building
electrical service ground bus.
3.11
Conduit shall enter into the Fire alarm Control Panel back box only at those areas of the
back box which have factory conduit knockouts.
3.12
All field wiring shall be completely supervised. In the event of a primary power failure,
disconnected standby battery, removal of any internal modules, or any open circuits in
the field wiring; an audible and visual trouble signal will be activated until the system and
its associated field wiring are restored to normal condition.
3.13
All cables and wiring shall be listed for Fire Alarm/Life Safety use, and shall be of the type
as required by and installed per CEC Article 760.
3.14
Final System Acceptance
3.14.1 Provide an NFPA Certificate of Compliance to DSA, the School District and Local
Fire Marshall. Complete fire alarm system shall comply with and be soundtested for a “Temporal Pattern” in all zones.
3.14.2 Beam detectors shall be tested by two methods:
3.14.2.1
Manual slow cover test to confirm reflector alignment is correct.
3.14.2.2
Software fire test per UL268.5 to demonstrate when signal level is
reduced simulating obstruction the detector will go into alarm.
3.14.3 The system will be accepted only after a satisfactory test of the entire system has
been accomplished by a Factory-Trained Distributor in the presence of a
representative of the authority having jurisdiction and the Owner's representative.
This contractor shall provide all personnel, ladders and testing equipment to
assist the local authority in completing this test. Actuate each device and verify
that the system performs as specified.
3.14.4 The Contractor will present a complete set of "as-built" Fire Alarm/Life Safety
system drawings, and the factory supplied Operator's Manuals as required by the
General Provisions section of this specification.
END OF SECTION
Grossmont District Auxiliary Office
Grossmont College
©
JCE #15079
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
28 30 00–8
®
TrueAlarm Analog Sensing
UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved;
MEA (NYC) Acceptance*
TrueAlarm Analog Sensors – Photoelectric,
Ionization, and Heat; Standard Bases and Accessories
Features
TrueAlarm® analog sensing provides:
• Digital transmission of analog sensor values via
IDNet™ or MAPNET II® two-wire communications**
For use with the following Simplex® products:
• 4010 and 4100U Series control panels; and 4008 Series
control panels with reduced feature set (refer to data
sheet S4008-0001 for details)
• 4020, 4100, and 4120 Series control panels, Universal
Transponders and 2120 TrueAlarm CDTs equipped for
MAPNET II operation
Fire alarm control panel provides:
• Peak value logging allowing accurate analysis of each
sensor for individual sensitivity selection
• Sensitivity monitoring satisfying NFPA 72® sensitivity
testing requirements; automatic individual sensor
calibration check verifies sensor integrity
• Automatic environmental compensation, multi-stage
alarm operation, and display of sensitivity directly in
percent per foot
• Ability to display and print detailed sensor information
in plain English language
Photoelectric smoke sensors provide:
• Seven levels of sensitivity from 0.2% to 3.7%
Heat sensors provide:
• Fixed temperature sensing
• Rate-of-rise temperature sensing
• Utility temperature sensing
Ionization smoke sensors provide:
• Three levels of sensitivity; 0.5%, 0.9%, and 1.3%
General features:
• UL listed to Standard 268
• Louvered smoke sensor design enhances smoke
capture by directing flow to chamber; entrance areas
are minimally visible when ceiling mounted
• Designed for EMI compatibility
• Magnetic test feature is provided
• Optional accessories include remote LED alarm
indicator and output relays
Additional base reference:
• For isolator bases, refer to data sheet S4098-0025
• For sounder bases, refer to data sheet S4098-0028
• For photo/heat sensors, refer to data sheet S4098-0024
(single address) and S4098-0033 (dual address)
* These products have been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to
Section 13144.1 of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listings
7272-0026:218, 7271-0026:231, 7270-0026:216, and 7300-0026:217 for allowable values
and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. It is subject to
re-examination, revision, and possible cancellation. Accepted for use – City of New York
Department of Buildings – MEA35-93E. Additional listings may be applicable, contact your
local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex
Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Safety Products Westminster.
4098-9714 TrueAlarm Photoelectric
Sensor Mounted in Base
Description
Digital Communication of Analog Sensing.
TrueAlarm analog sensors provide an analog
measurement digitally communicated to the host control
panel using Simplex addressable communications. At the
control panel, the data is analyzed and an average value is
determined and stored. An alarm or other abnormal
condition is determined by comparing the sensor’s present
value against its average value and time.
Intelligent Data Evaluation. Monitoring each sensor’s
average value provides a continuously shifting reference
point. This software filtering process compensates for
environmental factors (dust, dirt, etc.) and component
aging, providing an accurate reference for evaluating new
activity. With this filtering, there is a significant reduction
in the probability of false or nuisance alarms caused by
shifts in sensitivity, either up or down.
Control Panel Selection. Peak activity per sensor is
stored to assist in evaluating specific locations. The alarm
set point for each TrueAlarm sensor is determined at the
host control panel, selectable as more or less sensitive as
the individual application requires.
Timed/Multi-Stage Selection. Sensor alarm set points
can be programmed for timed automatic sensitivity
selection (such as more sensitive at night, less sensitive
during day). Control panel programming can also provide
multi-stage operation per sensor. For example, a 0.2%
level may cause a warning to prompt investigation while a
2.5% level may initiate an alarm.
Sensor Alarm and Trouble LED Indication. Each
sensor base’s LED pulses to indicate communications
with the panel. If the control panel determines a sensor is
in alarm, or is dirty or has some other type of trouble, the
details are annunciated at the control panel and that sensor
base’s LED will be turned on steadily. During a system
alarm, the control panel will control the LEDs such that
an LED indicating a trouble will return to pulsing to help
identify the alarmed sensors.
** TrueAlarm analog sensors are protected by one or more of the following U.S. Patents:
5,155,468; 5,173,683; 5,400,014; 5,543,777; 5,710,541; D383,407; D388,352; D392,573.
MAPNET II and IDNet addressable communications designs are protected by U.S. Patent
No. 4,796,025.
S4098-0019-12 8/2008
TrueAlarm Sensor Bases and Accessories
Description
Sensor Base Features
TrueAlarm sensor bases contain integral addressable
electronics that constantly monitor the status of the
detachable photoelectric, ionization, or heat sensors. Each
sensor’s output is digitized and transmitted to the system
fire alarm control panel every four seconds.
Base mounted address selection:
• Address remains with its programmed location
• Accessible from front (DIP switch under sensor)
General features:
• Automatic identification provides default sensitivity
when substituting sensor types
• Integral red LED for power-on (pulsing), or alarm or
trouble (steady on)
• Locking anti-tamper design mounts on standard outlet
box
• Magnetically operated functional test
Since TrueAlarm sensors use the same base, different
sensor types can be easily interchanged to meet specific
location requirements. This feature also allows intentional
sensor substitution during building construction. When
conditions are temporarily dusty, instead of covering the
smoke sensors (causing them to be disabled), heat sensors
may be installed without reprogramming the control
panel. Although the control panel will indicate an
incorrect sensor type, the heat sensor will operate at a
default sensitivity providing heat detection for building
protection at that location.
Sensor Bases
4098-9792, Standard sensor base
4098-9789, Sensor base with wired connections for:
Mounting Reference
• 2098-9808 Remote LED alarm indicator or 4098-9822
relay (unsupervised)
Electrical Box Requirements: (boxes are by others)
4098-9791, Sensor base with supervised relay driver
output (not compatible with 2120 CDT):
Without relay: 4" octagonal or 4" square, 1-1/2" deep;
single gang, 2" deep
• Relay operation is programmable and can be manually
operated from control panel
• Use with remote mount 2098-9737 relay
• Also includes wired connections for remote LED alarm
indicator or 4098-9822 relay
With relay : 4" octagonal or 4" square, 1-1/2" deep,
with 1-1/2" extension ring
4" (102 mm) Square Box
4" (102 mm) Octagonal Box
Surface mount reference
Sensor Base Options
2098-9737, Remote or local mount supervised relay:
• DPDT contacts for resistive/suppressed loads, power
limited rating of 3 A @ 28 VDC; non-power limited
rating of 3 A @ 120 VAC (requires external 24 VDC
coil power)
1-1/2" (38 mm)
minimum box depth
Flush mount reference, mount even with final
surface, or with up to 1/4" (6.4 mm) maximum recess
2098-9737 Relay (mounts in
base electrical box or remotely)
4098-9822, LED Annunciation Relay:
• Activates when base LED is on steady, indicating local
alarm or trouble
• DPDT contacts for resistive/suppressed loads, power
limited rating of 2 A @ 28 VDC; non-power limited
rating of 1/2 A @ 120 VAC, (requires external 24 VDC
coil power)
Relay Size: 2-1/2" X 1-1/2" X 1" (3.75 cubic inches)
(64 mm X 38 mm X 25.4 mm)
4098-9832, Adapter plate:
• Required for surface or semi-flush mounting to
4” square electrical box and for surface mounting to
4” octagonal box
• Can be used for cosmetic retrofitting to existing 6-3/8”
diameter base product
NOTE: Review total wire count, wire size, and accessories
being wired to determine required box volume.
6-3/8" (162 mm)
2098-9808, Remote red LED Alarm
Indicator:
• Mounts on single gang box
(shown in illustration to right)
4098-9822 Relay (mounts
in base electrical box)
1/4"
(6.4 mm)
ALARM
4098-9832 Adapter Plate, required for
mounting to surface mounted boxes
and 4" square flush box
4-7/8" (124 mm)
15/16"
(24 mm)
TrueAlarm Bases
4098-9789, -9791, & -9792
2
S4098-0019-12 8/2008
TrueAlarm Sensors
4098-9714 Photoelectric Sensor
Features
TrueAlarm photoelectric sensors use a stable, pulsed
infrared LED light source and a silicon photodiode
receiver to provide consistent and accurate low power
smoke sensing. Seven levels of sensitivity are available
for each individual sensor, ranging from 0.2% to 3.7% per
foot of smoke obscuration. Sensitivity is selected and
monitored at the fire alarm control panel.
The sensor head design provides 360° smoke entry for
optimum response to smoke from any direction. Due to its
photoelectric operation, air velocity is not normally a
factor, except for impact on area smoke flow.
Sealed against rear air flow entry
Interchangeable mounting
EMI/RFI shielded electronics
Heat sensors:
• Selectable rate compensated, fixed temperature
sensing with or without rate-of-rise operation
• Rated spacing distance between sensors:
Fixed Temp.
Setting
UL & ULC
Spacing
135° F
(57.2° C)
60 ft x 60 ft
(18.3 m)
FM Spacing, Either Fixed
Temperature Setting
20 ft x 20 ft (6.1 m) for fixed
temperature only; RTI = Quick
40 ft x 40 ft
(12.2 m)
50 ft x 50 ft (15.2 m) for fixed
temperature with either rate-of-rise
selection; RTI = Ultra Fast
155° F
(68° C)
4-7/8" (124 mm)
LED status indicator
2-1/8"
(54 mm)
Smoke Sensors:
• Photoelectric or ionization technology sensing
• 360° smoke entry for optimum response
• Built-in insect screens
4098-9733 Heat Sensor
4098-9714 Photoelectric Sensor with Base
4098-9717 Ionization Sensor
TrueAlarm heat sensors are self-restoring and provide rate
compensated, fixed temperature sensing, selectable with
or without rate-of-rise temperature sensing. Due to its
small thermal mass, the sensor accurately and quickly
measures the local temperature for analysis at the fire
alarm control panel.
Rate-of-rise temperature detection is selectable at the
control panel for either 15° F (8.3° C) or 20° F (11.1° C)
per minute. Fixed temperature sensing is independent of
rate-of-rise sensing and programmable to operate at
135° F (57.2° C) or 155° F (68° C). In a slow developing
fire, the temperature may not increase rapidly enough to
operate the rate-of-rise feature. However, an alarm will be
initiated when the temperature reaches its rated fixed
temperature setting.
TrueAlarm heat sensors can be programmed as a utility
device to monitor for temperature extremes in the range
from 32° F to 155° F (0° C to 68° C). This feature can
provide freeze warnings or alert to HVAC system
problems. Refer to specific panels for availability.
TrueAlarm Ionization sensors use a single radioactive
source with an outer sampling ionization chamber and an
inner reference ionization chamber to provide stable
operation under fluctuations in environmental conditions
such as temperature and humidity. Smoke and invisible
combustion gases can freely penetrate the outer chamber.
With both chambers ionized by a small radioactive source
[Am 241 (Americium)], a very small current flows in the
circuit. The presence of particles of combustion will cause
a change in the voltage ratio between chambers. This
difference is measured by the electronics in the sensor
base and digitally transmitted back to the control panel for
processing.
Three levels of sensitivity are available for each
ionization sensor: 0.5, 0.9, and 1.3% per foot of smoke
obscuration.
4-7/8" (124 mm)
LED status indicator
4-7/8" (124 mm)
2-1/8"
(54 mm)
LED status indicator
2-3/8"
(60 mm)
4098-9717 Ionization Sensor with Base
Application Reference
Sensor locations should be determined only after careful
consideration of the physical layout and contents of the
area to be protected. Refer to NFPA 72, the National Fire
Alarm Code®. On smooth ceilings, smoke sensor spacing
of 30 ft (9.1 m) may be used as a guide. For detailed
application information, refer to 4098 Detectors, Sensors,
and Bases Application Manual (574-709).
4098-9733 Heat Sensor with Base
WARNING: In most fires, hazardous levels of smoke
and toxic gas can build up before a heat detection
device would initiate an alarm. In cases where Life
Safety is a factor, the use of smoke detection is highly
recommended.
3
S4098-0019-12 8/2008
TrueAlarm Analog Sensing Product Selection Chart
TrueAlarm Sensor Bases*
Model
Description
Compatibility
Mounting Requirements
4” octagonal or 4” square box, 1-1/2” min.
depth; or single gang box, 2” min. depth
4098-9792
Standard Sensor Base, no options
Sensors 4098-9714, -9733, & -9717
4098-9789
Sensor Base with connections for
Remote LED Alarm Indicator or
Unsupervised Relay
2098-9808 remote LED alarm
indicator or 4098-9822 relay
4” octagonal or 4” square box
4098-9791
Sensor Base with connections for
Supervised Remote Relay and
connections for Remote Alarm
Indicator or Unsupervised Relay
Sensors 4098-9714, -9733, & -9717
2098-9737 remote relay (supervised)
2098-9808 remote alarm indicator or
4098-9822 relay (unsupervised)
Note: Box depth requirements depend
on total wire count and wire size, refer to
accessories list below for reference.
Sensors 4098-9714, -9733, & -9717
TrueAlarm Sensors
Model
Description
4098-9714
Photoelectric Smoke Sensor
4098-9717
Ionization Smoke Sensor
4098-9733
Heat Sensor
Compatibility
Mounting Requirements
Bases 4098-9792, 4098-9789,
and 4098-9791
Refer to base requirements
TrueAlarm Sensor/Base Accessories
Model
2098-9737
2098-9808
4098-9822
4098-9832
Description
Compatibility
Supervised Relay, mounts remote
or in base electrical box
For use with 4098-9791 base
Remote Red LED Alarm Indicator
on single gang stainless steel plate
Relay, tracks base LED status
(unsupervised, mounts only in base
electrical box)
Bases 4098-9789 and 4098-9791
Adapter Plate
Bases 4098-9792, -9789, & -9791
Mounting Requirements
Remote Mounting requires 4” octagonal or
4” square box, 1-1/2” minimum depth
Base Mounting requires 4” octagonal box,
2-1/8” deep with 1-1/2” extension ring
Single gang box, 1-1/2” minimum depth
4” octagonal box, 2-1/8” deep with 1-1/2”
extension ring
Required for surface or semi-flush
mounted 4” square box and for surface
mounted 4” octagonal box
* Refer to Installation Instructions 574-707 and Application Manual 574-709 for additional information.
Specifications
General Operating Specifications
Communications and Sensor Supervisory Power
MAPNET II or IDNet, auto-select, 24-40 VDC w/data, 400 μA typical,
1 address per base
Communications Connections
Screw terminals for in/out wiring, 18 to 14 AWG (0.82 mm to 2.08 mm )
Remote LED Alarm Indicator Current
1 mA typical, no impact to alarm current
Remote LED Alarm Indicator and Relay Connections
Color coded wire leads, 18 AWG (0.82 mm )
UL Listed Temperature Range
32° to 100° F (0° to 38° C)
Operating
Temperature Range
2
2
with 4098-9717 or 4098 -9733 32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C)
with 4098-9714 15° to 122° F (-9° to 50° C)
Humidity Range
Smoke Sensor
Ambient Ratings
2
10 to 95% RH
4098-9714, Photoelectric Sensor Air velocity = 0-2000 ft/min (0-610 m/min)
4098-9717, Ionization Sensor Air velocity = 0-200 ft/min (0-61 m/min); Altitude is up to 8000 ft (2.4 km)
Housing Color
Frost White
4098-9791 Base With Supervised Remote Relay 2098-9737 (see page 2 for contact ratings)
Externally Supplied Relay Coil Voltage
18-32 VDC (nominal 24 VDC)
Supervisory Current
270 μA, from 24 VDC supply
Alarm Current with 2098-9737 Relay
28 mA, from 24 VDC supply
4098-9822 Unsupervised Relay, Requirements for Bases 4098-9789 and 4098-9791 (see page 2 for contact ratings)
Externally Supplied Relay Coil Voltage
18-32 VDC (nominal 24 VDC)
Supervisory Current
Supplied from communications
Alarm Current
13 mA from separate 24 VDC supply
Tyco is a registered trademark of Tyco International Services GMBH and is used under license. Simplex, the Simplex logo, TrueAlarm, IDNet, and MAPNET II are trademarks of
Tyco International Ltd. and its affiliates and are used under license. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA).
Tyco Safety Products Westminster • Westminster, MA • 01441-0001 • USA
www.tycosafetyproducts-usa-wm.com
S4098-0019-12 8/2008
© 2008 Tyco Safety Products Westminster. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.
CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION
OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL
FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM
LISTING SERVICE
LISTING No.
7272-0026:0218
Page 1 of 1
CATEGORY:
7272 -- SMOKE DETECTOR-SYSTEM TYPE-PHOTOELECTRIC
LISTEE:
Simplex100 Simplex Drive, Westminster, MA 01441-0001
Contact: Jim Goyette (978) 731-8580 Fax (978) 731-8881
Email: jgoyette@tycoint.com
DESIGN:
Models 4098-9714, -9714TSP, -9714TTP, -9754 -9754TSP, -9754TTP; GSA4098-9714, and
-9754 analog photoelectric type smoke detectors. Units are intended for use with smoke
detector bases Models 4098-9789 9789TSP, -9789TTP, -9791, -9791TSP,
-9791TTP, -9792, -9792TSP, 9792TTP, -9793, 9793TSP, -9793TTP, -9794,
-9794TSP,-9794TTP; GSA4098-9792, and -9793 (CSFM Listing No. 7300-0026:217).
Models 4098-9714, -9714TSP and -9714TTP are listed for use with Models 4098-9750,-9751,
-9752 and -9753 duct detector units (CSFM Listing No. 3240-0026:220) and Models
4098-9755, -9755TSP and -9755TTP duct detector units (CSFM Listing No. 3240-0026:241).
Models 4098-9754, -9754TSP, -9754TTP; GSA4098-9754 analog photoelectric type smoke
detectors employ an integral supplemental heat sensor (1350 F fixed temperature and 1200
F rate of rise). This heat sensor is intended for use as a supplemental device to the smoke
detector and is not intended for use in lieu of required heat detectors.
Refer to listee's printed data sheet for additional detailed product description and operational
considerations.
INSTALLATION:
In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances
and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Model 4098-9714 with Model
4098-9751 is suitable for installations inside air ducts with air velocities between 0-2000 fpm.
MARKING:
Listee's name, model number, electrical rating, and UL label.
APPROVAL:
Listed as photoelectric smoke detectors for use with listee’s separately listed *compatible
fire alarm control units. Refer to listee’s Installation Instruction Manual for details.
NOTE:
The photoelectric type detectors are generally more effective at detecting slow, smoldering
fires which smolder for hours before bursting into flames. Sources of these fires may include
cigarettes burning in couches or bedding. The ionization type detectors are generally more
effective at detecting fast, flaming fires that consume combustible materials rapidly and
spread quickly. Sources of these fires may include paper burning in a waste container or a
grease fire in the kitchen.
*Rev. 12-02-13 gt
This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed
the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not
an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct
operational requirements or installation criteria.
Refer to listee’s data sheet, installation instructions and/or other
Date Issued:
July 01, 2015
Authorized By:
JAMES PARSEGIAN, Program Coordinator
Fire Engineering Division
Listing Expires
June 30, 2016
®
TrueAlarm Analog Sensing
UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved;
MEA (NYC) Acceptance*
TrueAlarm Analog Sensors – Photoelectric,
Ionization, and Heat; Standard Bases and Accessories
Features
TrueAlarm® analog sensing provides:
• Digital transmission of analog sensor values via
IDNet™ or MAPNET II® two-wire communications**
For use with the following Simplex® products:
• 4010 and 4100U Series control panels; and 4008 Series
control panels with reduced feature set (refer to data
sheet S4008-0001 for details)
• 4020, 4100, and 4120 Series control panels, Universal
Transponders and 2120 TrueAlarm CDTs equipped for
MAPNET II operation
Fire alarm control panel provides:
• Peak value logging allowing accurate analysis of each
sensor for individual sensitivity selection
• Sensitivity monitoring satisfying NFPA 72® sensitivity
testing requirements; automatic individual sensor
calibration check verifies sensor integrity
• Automatic environmental compensation, multi-stage
alarm operation, and display of sensitivity directly in
percent per foot
• Ability to display and print detailed sensor information
in plain English language
Photoelectric smoke sensors provide:
• Seven levels of sensitivity from 0.2% to 3.7%
Heat sensors provide:
• Fixed temperature sensing
• Rate-of-rise temperature sensing
• Utility temperature sensing
Ionization smoke sensors provide:
• Three levels of sensitivity; 0.5%, 0.9%, and 1.3%
General features:
• UL listed to Standard 268
• Louvered smoke sensor design enhances smoke
capture by directing flow to chamber; entrance areas
are minimally visible when ceiling mounted
• Designed for EMI compatibility
• Magnetic test feature is provided
• Optional accessories include remote LED alarm
indicator and output relays
Additional base reference:
• For isolator bases, refer to data sheet S4098-0025
• For sounder bases, refer to data sheet S4098-0028
• For photo/heat sensors, refer to data sheet S4098-0024
(single address) and S4098-0033 (dual address)
* These products have been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to
Section 13144.1 of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listings
7272-0026:218, 7271-0026:231, 7270-0026:216, and 7300-0026:217 for allowable values
and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. It is subject to
re-examination, revision, and possible cancellation. Accepted for use – City of New York
Department of Buildings – MEA35-93E. Additional listings may be applicable, contact your
local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex
Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Safety Products Westminster.
4098-9714 TrueAlarm Photoelectric
Sensor Mounted in Base
Description
Digital Communication of Analog Sensing.
TrueAlarm analog sensors provide an analog
measurement digitally communicated to the host control
panel using Simplex addressable communications. At the
control panel, the data is analyzed and an average value is
determined and stored. An alarm or other abnormal
condition is determined by comparing the sensor’s present
value against its average value and time.
Intelligent Data Evaluation. Monitoring each sensor’s
average value provides a continuously shifting reference
point. This software filtering process compensates for
environmental factors (dust, dirt, etc.) and component
aging, providing an accurate reference for evaluating new
activity. With this filtering, there is a significant reduction
in the probability of false or nuisance alarms caused by
shifts in sensitivity, either up or down.
Control Panel Selection. Peak activity per sensor is
stored to assist in evaluating specific locations. The alarm
set point for each TrueAlarm sensor is determined at the
host control panel, selectable as more or less sensitive as
the individual application requires.
Timed/Multi-Stage Selection. Sensor alarm set points
can be programmed for timed automatic sensitivity
selection (such as more sensitive at night, less sensitive
during day). Control panel programming can also provide
multi-stage operation per sensor. For example, a 0.2%
level may cause a warning to prompt investigation while a
2.5% level may initiate an alarm.
Sensor Alarm and Trouble LED Indication. Each
sensor base’s LED pulses to indicate communications
with the panel. If the control panel determines a sensor is
in alarm, or is dirty or has some other type of trouble, the
details are annunciated at the control panel and that sensor
base’s LED will be turned on steadily. During a system
alarm, the control panel will control the LEDs such that
an LED indicating a trouble will return to pulsing to help
identify the alarmed sensors.
** TrueAlarm analog sensors are protected by one or more of the following U.S. Patents:
5,155,468; 5,173,683; 5,400,014; 5,543,777; 5,710,541; D383,407; D388,352; D392,573.
MAPNET II and IDNet addressable communications designs are protected by U.S. Patent
No. 4,796,025.
S4098-0019-12 8/2008
TrueAlarm Sensor Bases and Accessories
Description
Sensor Base Features
TrueAlarm sensor bases contain integral addressable
electronics that constantly monitor the status of the
detachable photoelectric, ionization, or heat sensors. Each
sensor’s output is digitized and transmitted to the system
fire alarm control panel every four seconds.
Base mounted address selection:
• Address remains with its programmed location
• Accessible from front (DIP switch under sensor)
General features:
• Automatic identification provides default sensitivity
when substituting sensor types
• Integral red LED for power-on (pulsing), or alarm or
trouble (steady on)
• Locking anti-tamper design mounts on standard outlet
box
• Magnetically operated functional test
Since TrueAlarm sensors use the same base, different
sensor types can be easily interchanged to meet specific
location requirements. This feature also allows intentional
sensor substitution during building construction. When
conditions are temporarily dusty, instead of covering the
smoke sensors (causing them to be disabled), heat sensors
may be installed without reprogramming the control
panel. Although the control panel will indicate an
incorrect sensor type, the heat sensor will operate at a
default sensitivity providing heat detection for building
protection at that location.
Sensor Bases
4098-9792, Standard sensor base
4098-9789, Sensor base with wired connections for:
Mounting Reference
• 2098-9808 Remote LED alarm indicator or 4098-9822
relay (unsupervised)
Electrical Box Requirements: (boxes are by others)
4098-9791, Sensor base with supervised relay driver
output (not compatible with 2120 CDT):
Without relay: 4" octagonal or 4" square, 1-1/2" deep;
single gang, 2" deep
• Relay operation is programmable and can be manually
operated from control panel
• Use with remote mount 2098-9737 relay
• Also includes wired connections for remote LED alarm
indicator or 4098-9822 relay
With relay : 4" octagonal or 4" square, 1-1/2" deep,
with 1-1/2" extension ring
4" (102 mm) Square Box
4" (102 mm) Octagonal Box
Surface mount reference
Sensor Base Options
2098-9737, Remote or local mount supervised relay:
• DPDT contacts for resistive/suppressed loads, power
limited rating of 3 A @ 28 VDC; non-power limited
rating of 3 A @ 120 VAC (requires external 24 VDC
coil power)
1-1/2" (38 mm)
minimum box depth
Flush mount reference, mount even with final
surface, or with up to 1/4" (6.4 mm) maximum recess
2098-9737 Relay (mounts in
base electrical box or remotely)
4098-9822, LED Annunciation Relay:
• Activates when base LED is on steady, indicating local
alarm or trouble
• DPDT contacts for resistive/suppressed loads, power
limited rating of 2 A @ 28 VDC; non-power limited
rating of 1/2 A @ 120 VAC, (requires external 24 VDC
coil power)
Relay Size: 2-1/2" X 1-1/2" X 1" (3.75 cubic inches)
(64 mm X 38 mm X 25.4 mm)
4098-9832, Adapter plate:
• Required for surface or semi-flush mounting to
4” square electrical box and for surface mounting to
4” octagonal box
• Can be used for cosmetic retrofitting to existing 6-3/8”
diameter base product
NOTE: Review total wire count, wire size, and accessories
being wired to determine required box volume.
6-3/8" (162 mm)
2098-9808, Remote red LED Alarm
Indicator:
• Mounts on single gang box
(shown in illustration to right)
4098-9822 Relay (mounts
in base electrical box)
1/4"
(6.4 mm)
ALARM
4098-9832 Adapter Plate, required for
mounting to surface mounted boxes
and 4" square flush box
4-7/8" (124 mm)
15/16"
(24 mm)
TrueAlarm Bases
4098-9789, -9791, & -9792
2
S4098-0019-12 8/2008
TrueAlarm Sensors
4098-9714 Photoelectric Sensor
Features
TrueAlarm photoelectric sensors use a stable, pulsed
infrared LED light source and a silicon photodiode
receiver to provide consistent and accurate low power
smoke sensing. Seven levels of sensitivity are available
for each individual sensor, ranging from 0.2% to 3.7% per
foot of smoke obscuration. Sensitivity is selected and
monitored at the fire alarm control panel.
The sensor head design provides 360° smoke entry for
optimum response to smoke from any direction. Due to its
photoelectric operation, air velocity is not normally a
factor, except for impact on area smoke flow.
Sealed against rear air flow entry
Interchangeable mounting
EMI/RFI shielded electronics
Heat sensors:
• Selectable rate compensated, fixed temperature
sensing with or without rate-of-rise operation
• Rated spacing distance between sensors:
Fixed Temp.
Setting
UL & ULC
Spacing
135° F
(57.2° C)
60 ft x 60 ft
(18.3 m)
FM Spacing, Either Fixed
Temperature Setting
20 ft x 20 ft (6.1 m) for fixed
temperature only; RTI = Quick
40 ft x 40 ft
(12.2 m)
50 ft x 50 ft (15.2 m) for fixed
temperature with either rate-of-rise
selection; RTI = Ultra Fast
155° F
(68° C)
4-7/8" (124 mm)
LED status indicator
2-1/8"
(54 mm)
Smoke Sensors:
• Photoelectric or ionization technology sensing
• 360° smoke entry for optimum response
• Built-in insect screens
4098-9733 Heat Sensor
4098-9714 Photoelectric Sensor with Base
4098-9717 Ionization Sensor
TrueAlarm heat sensors are self-restoring and provide rate
compensated, fixed temperature sensing, selectable with
or without rate-of-rise temperature sensing. Due to its
small thermal mass, the sensor accurately and quickly
measures the local temperature for analysis at the fire
alarm control panel.
Rate-of-rise temperature detection is selectable at the
control panel for either 15° F (8.3° C) or 20° F (11.1° C)
per minute. Fixed temperature sensing is independent of
rate-of-rise sensing and programmable to operate at
135° F (57.2° C) or 155° F (68° C). In a slow developing
fire, the temperature may not increase rapidly enough to
operate the rate-of-rise feature. However, an alarm will be
initiated when the temperature reaches its rated fixed
temperature setting.
TrueAlarm heat sensors can be programmed as a utility
device to monitor for temperature extremes in the range
from 32° F to 155° F (0° C to 68° C). This feature can
provide freeze warnings or alert to HVAC system
problems. Refer to specific panels for availability.
TrueAlarm Ionization sensors use a single radioactive
source with an outer sampling ionization chamber and an
inner reference ionization chamber to provide stable
operation under fluctuations in environmental conditions
such as temperature and humidity. Smoke and invisible
combustion gases can freely penetrate the outer chamber.
With both chambers ionized by a small radioactive source
[Am 241 (Americium)], a very small current flows in the
circuit. The presence of particles of combustion will cause
a change in the voltage ratio between chambers. This
difference is measured by the electronics in the sensor
base and digitally transmitted back to the control panel for
processing.
Three levels of sensitivity are available for each
ionization sensor: 0.5, 0.9, and 1.3% per foot of smoke
obscuration.
4-7/8" (124 mm)
LED status indicator
4-7/8" (124 mm)
2-1/8"
(54 mm)
LED status indicator
2-3/8"
(60 mm)
4098-9717 Ionization Sensor with Base
Application Reference
Sensor locations should be determined only after careful
consideration of the physical layout and contents of the
area to be protected. Refer to NFPA 72, the National Fire
Alarm Code®. On smooth ceilings, smoke sensor spacing
of 30 ft (9.1 m) may be used as a guide. For detailed
application information, refer to 4098 Detectors, Sensors,
and Bases Application Manual (574-709).
4098-9733 Heat Sensor with Base
WARNING: In most fires, hazardous levels of smoke
and toxic gas can build up before a heat detection
device would initiate an alarm. In cases where Life
Safety is a factor, the use of smoke detection is highly
recommended.
3
S4098-0019-12 8/2008
TrueAlarm Analog Sensing Product Selection Chart
TrueAlarm Sensor Bases*
Model
Description
Compatibility
Mounting Requirements
4” octagonal or 4” square box, 1-1/2” min.
depth; or single gang box, 2” min. depth
4098-9792
Standard Sensor Base, no options
Sensors 4098-9714, -9733, & -9717
4098-9789
Sensor Base with connections for
Remote LED Alarm Indicator or
Unsupervised Relay
2098-9808 remote LED alarm
indicator or 4098-9822 relay
4” octagonal or 4” square box
4098-9791
Sensor Base with connections for
Supervised Remote Relay and
connections for Remote Alarm
Indicator or Unsupervised Relay
Sensors 4098-9714, -9733, & -9717
2098-9737 remote relay (supervised)
2098-9808 remote alarm indicator or
4098-9822 relay (unsupervised)
Note: Box depth requirements depend
on total wire count and wire size, refer to
accessories list below for reference.
Sensors 4098-9714, -9733, & -9717
TrueAlarm Sensors
Model
Description
4098-9714
Photoelectric Smoke Sensor
4098-9717
Ionization Smoke Sensor
4098-9733
Heat Sensor
Compatibility
Mounting Requirements
Bases 4098-9792, 4098-9789,
and 4098-9791
Refer to base requirements
TrueAlarm Sensor/Base Accessories
Model
2098-9737
2098-9808
4098-9822
4098-9832
Description
Compatibility
Supervised Relay, mounts remote
or in base electrical box
For use with 4098-9791 base
Remote Red LED Alarm Indicator
on single gang stainless steel plate
Relay, tracks base LED status
(unsupervised, mounts only in base
electrical box)
Bases 4098-9789 and 4098-9791
Adapter Plate
Bases 4098-9792, -9789, & -9791
Mounting Requirements
Remote Mounting requires 4” octagonal or
4” square box, 1-1/2” minimum depth
Base Mounting requires 4” octagonal box,
2-1/8” deep with 1-1/2” extension ring
Single gang box, 1-1/2” minimum depth
4” octagonal box, 2-1/8” deep with 1-1/2”
extension ring
Required for surface or semi-flush
mounted 4” square box and for surface
mounted 4” octagonal box
* Refer to Installation Instructions 574-707 and Application Manual 574-709 for additional information.
Specifications
General Operating Specifications
Communications and Sensor Supervisory Power
MAPNET II or IDNet, auto-select, 24-40 VDC w/data, 400 μA typical,
1 address per base
Communications Connections
Screw terminals for in/out wiring, 18 to 14 AWG (0.82 mm to 2.08 mm )
Remote LED Alarm Indicator Current
1 mA typical, no impact to alarm current
Remote LED Alarm Indicator and Relay Connections
Color coded wire leads, 18 AWG (0.82 mm )
UL Listed Temperature Range
32° to 100° F (0° to 38° C)
Operating
Temperature Range
2
2
with 4098-9717 or 4098 -9733 32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C)
with 4098-9714 15° to 122° F (-9° to 50° C)
Humidity Range
Smoke Sensor
Ambient Ratings
2
10 to 95% RH
4098-9714, Photoelectric Sensor Air velocity = 0-2000 ft/min (0-610 m/min)
4098-9717, Ionization Sensor Air velocity = 0-200 ft/min (0-61 m/min); Altitude is up to 8000 ft (2.4 km)
Housing Color
Frost White
4098-9791 Base With Supervised Remote Relay 2098-9737 (see page 2 for contact ratings)
Externally Supplied Relay Coil Voltage
18-32 VDC (nominal 24 VDC)
Supervisory Current
270 μA, from 24 VDC supply
Alarm Current with 2098-9737 Relay
28 mA, from 24 VDC supply
4098-9822 Unsupervised Relay, Requirements for Bases 4098-9789 and 4098-9791 (see page 2 for contact ratings)
Externally Supplied Relay Coil Voltage
18-32 VDC (nominal 24 VDC)
Supervisory Current
Supplied from communications
Alarm Current
13 mA from separate 24 VDC supply
Tyco is a registered trademark of Tyco International Services GMBH and is used under license. Simplex, the Simplex logo, TrueAlarm, IDNet, and MAPNET II are trademarks of
Tyco International Ltd. and its affiliates and are used under license. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA).
Tyco Safety Products Westminster • Westminster, MA • 01441-0001 • USA
www.tycosafetyproducts-usa-wm.com
S4098-0019-12 8/2008
© 2008 Tyco Safety Products Westminster. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.
CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION
OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL
FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM
LISTING SERVICE
LISTING No.
7270-0026:0216
Page 1 of 1
CATEGORY:
7270 -- HEAT DETECTOR
LISTEE:
Simplex100 Simplex Drive, Westminster, MA 01441-0001
Contact: Jim Goyette (978) 731-8580 Fax (978) 731-8881
Email: jgoyette@tycoint.com
DESIGN:
Models 4098-9733, 4098-9733E, *4098-9734, *4098-9734E, GSA4098-9733 or
*GSA4098-9734 electric combination rate compensated, fixed temperature, and rate of rise
heat detectors. Intended for use with *listee's separately listed compatible detector bases.
Refer to listee's printed data sheet for additional detailed product description and operational
considerations.
RATING:
135°F and 155°F all models. 190°F (-9734 models only)
INSTALLATION:
In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances
and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.
MARKING:
Listee's name, model number, electrical/temperature ratings and UL label.
APPROVAL:
Listed as heat detector for use with listee’s separately listed compatible fire alarm control
units. Refer to listee’s Installation Instruction Manual for details.
*Rev. 02-18-14 gt
This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed
the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not
an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct
operational requirements or installation criteria.
Refer to listee’s data sheet, installation instructions and/or other
Date Issued:
July 01, 2015
Authorized By:
JAMES PARSEGIAN, Program Coordinator
Fire Engineering Division
Listing Expires
June 30, 2016
TrueAlarm Analog Sensing
UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved;
MEA (NYC) Acceptance*
Features
TrueAlarm Analog Sensors
Model 4098-9793, IDNet Isolator Base
1 + 24V ZONE PW R +
ZONE PW R 2 0V
3 +IDNET IDC +
4 - IDNET IDC -
5
6
7
8
1
5
2
6
3
7
SIMPLEX TIM E RECORDER CO .
4090-9101
M ONITOR ZAM, CLASS B
INSTAL . INSTR. 574 -183
4
8
DATE CODE:
1
Isolator base for TrueAlarm analog sensors
using IDNet addressable communications:
 Compatible with: Simplex® fire alarm control panel
models 4100ES, 4010ES, 4008, 4010, and 4100U
 When panel mounted quad isolation is also required for
4100ES and 4010ES panels, use IDNet+ Modules (see
diagram notes and individual panel data sheets)
 Can be installed up to 250 total allowing isolation
directly to the device level (200 total with 4008)
 Base mounted LED indicates sensor status
 Designed for EMI compatibility
 UL listed to Standard 268; ULC listed to Standard S529
Short circuit wiring isolation:
 Input is automatically separated from output when an
output communications short circuit occurs
Earth fault isolation reduces time to fix wiring
problems:
 Built-in control panel diagnostics assist in locating earth
fault conditions – the most common installation wiring
problem
Isolator base 4098-9793 is compatible with:
 Photoelectric sensor model 4098-9714
 Heat sensor model 4098-9733
 Multi-sensor model 4098-9754
For Class B or Class A wiring:
 Communications are received from either input or output
allowing bases with Class A wiring to isolate short
circuits while still operating their sensors
IDNet addressable device
TrueAlarm sensor
Out
4098-9793 Isolator Base
with TrueAlarm Sensor
FIRE
ALARM
PULL DOWN
Addressable station
TrueAlarm sensor
Description
TrueAlarm Sensing and IDNet communication
isolation. The 4098-9793 IDNet Communications
Isolator Base provides Simplex TrueAlarm analog sensor
operation and also provides IDNet communications
isolation to improve installation convenience and increase
system integrity. Isolation is automatically activated at the
base when an output short circuit is detected and isolation
can also be selected per base manually from the control
panel to assist with troubleshooting wiring problems.
Operation. Isolator bases power-up in isolation mode
and are directed to connect by the control panel. If the
output wiring is acceptable, the isolator base will connect
to the rest of the circuit. If the output wiring is shorted,
the isolator remains isolated.
* This product is listed by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section
13144.1 of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing 7300-0026:0217
for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document.
Accepted for use – City of New York Department of Buildings – MEA35-93E. Additional
listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest
status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of
Tyco Fire Protection Products.
IDNet Channel with a Single 4098-9793 Isolator Base
(4100ES Fire Alarm Control Panel shown for reference)
Description (Continued)
Status Tracking. The isolator reports back to the panel
when it is in isolator mode and the extent of shorted
wiring is reported back to the panel by identifying device
addresses that are not communicating. [Isolators are
assigned sequentially to low number addresses to expedite
Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) power-up. Refer to
Installation Instructions 574-709 and 574-707 for
additional information.]
Earth Faults. During installation, earth faults often
occur and finding these faults normally requires extensive
wiring disconnection. With the 4098-9793 isolator base,
wiring suspected to have earth faults can be isolated to
assist in their discovery and repair.
S4098-0025-6 6/2014
Multi-Floor Isolator Example 1
The one-line diagram on this page shows a multiple floor
example with Class B IDNet communications for each
floor starting at an isolator base. If any floor wiring
beyond the isolator base should experience a short circuit,
each floor can be individually separated from the next,
preventing the short circuit from disabling the entire
IDNet communications wiring.
In the event of an earth connection, each floor can be
individually isolated using the built-in control panel
diagnostics. With individual floor control, the earth fault
can be isolated to the floor level to narrow the search area.
Fourth floor
Third floor
Second floor
First floor
IDNet communications, 2 wire
(see wiring notes)
Class B riser
Compatible IDNet
device
4098-9793 IDNet Isolator
Base with TrueAlarm sensor
Wiring Notes:
1. Only IDNet communications wiring is shown.
2. Maximum resistance from panel to isolator and between
isolators is 10 ohms.
3. Some IDNet devices require additional wiring for power. Refer
to specific devices for details.
4. NOTE: For 4100ES, 4010ES, and 4100U systems, if panel
mounted IDNet Isolators are needed with remote isolators, use
an IDNet+ module with isolated output. (The 4100-3103 panel
mounted Quad Isolator is compatible with MAPNET II Remote
Isolators only.) Refer to data sheet S4100-0046 for the
4100-3107 Quad IDNet Isolator module and specific control
panel data sheets for details).
2
Compatible Simplex Fire Alarm
Control Panel (model 4010ES
shown for reference)
S4098-0025-6 6/2014
Multi-Floor Isolator Example 2
The illustration below is a modification of Example 1.
Wiring for each floor has an additional isolator base and
the IDNet circuit is wired as a Class A connection. With
the addition of these isolator bases, wiring between floors
can be better protected in the event of a short circuit.
Also, in the event of an earth connection, the additional
isolator base per floor allows earth fault isolation to be
achieved with better precision.
The isolator base examples on pages 2 and 3 show that as
more isolator bases are added to an IDNet addressable
communications loop, short circuit isolation and earth
fault location can be obtained with a resolution level as
close to the single device as required.
Fourth floor
Third floor
Second floor
First device
IDNet communications, 2 wire
(see wiring notes)
First floor
Alternate Wiring Example
Class A riser with Isolator
bases using Class B taps
Compatible IDNet
device
Last device
Class A
IDNet Circuit
4098-9793 IDNet Isolator
Base with TrueAlarm sensor
Wiring Notes:
1. Only IDNet communications wiring is shown.
2. Maximum resistance from panel to isolator and
between isolators is 10 ohms.
3. Some IDNet devices require additional wiring for
power. Refer to specific devices for details.
4. NOTE: For 4100ES, 4010ES, and 4100U
systems, if panel mounted IDNet Isolators are
needed with remote isolators, use an IDNet+
module with isolated output. (The 4100-3103
panel mounted Quad Isolator is compatible with
MAPNET II Remote Isolators only.) Refer to data
sheet S4100-0046 for the 4100-3107 Quad
IDNet Isolator module and specific control
panel data sheets for details).
4. For Class A IDNet communications, it is
recommended that Remote Isolators or Isolator
Bases be located close to the panel as the first
and the last device as indicated (not necessary
when using the 4100-3107 IDNet+ module or
other panel mounted IDNet+ module).
3
Compatible Simplex Fire Alarm
Control Panel (model 4100ES
shown for reference)
S4098-0025-6 6/2014
Specifications (for additional information refer to Installation Instructions 574-709 and 574-707)
Power and Communications
IDNet communications, one address per base
Maximum line resistance between panel and isolator, or between isolators is 10 ohms;
[18 AWG (0.82 mm2 ) = 780 ft (238 m)]
Screw terminals for in/out wiring, 18 to 14 AWG (0.82 to 2.08 mm2 )
32° F to 100° F (0° C to 38° C)
15° F to 122° F (-9° C to 50° C)
0° F to 140° F (-18° C to 60° C)
10 to 95% RH, from 32° F to 122° F (0° C to 50° C)
Frost white
Distance Specification
IDNet Connections
UL Listed Temperature Range
Operating Temperature Range
Storage Temperature Range
Humidity Range
Housing Color
Sensor Compatibility
(sensors are ordered separately)
Product
Data Sheet Reference
4098-9714, Photoelectric Sensor
4098-9733, Heat Sensor
S4098-0019
4098-9754, TrueSense Multi-Sensor
S4098-0024
4090-9116, Remote IDNet Isolator Module
S4090-0005
4090-9117, 24 V Addressable Power Isolator (not available
S4090-0006
with 4008 control panels)
Additional Isolator Products
Mounting Information
Electrical Box Requirements:
4" octagonal or 4" square, 1-1/2" deep;
single gang, 2" deep (by others)
Surface mount reference
4" (102 mm)
square box
4" (102 mm)
octagonal box
1-1/2" (38 mm)
minimum box depth
Flush mount reference, mount even with final
surface, or with up to 1/4" (6.4 mm) maximum recess
4098-9832 Adapter Plate, required for mounting
to surface mounted boxes and to 4" square flush mount boxes
1/4"
(6.4 mm)
6-3/8" (162 mm)
4098-9793
Isolator Base
TrueAlarm Sensor
(ordered separately)
4-7/8" (124 mm)
Assembled
Dimension
Reference
LED status indicator
2-1/8"
(54 mm)
Base height
15/16" (24 mm)
TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
Tyco Fire Protection Products • Westminster, MA • 01441-0001 • USA
www.simplexgrinnell.com
S4098-0025-6 6/2014
© 2014 Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.
CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION
OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL
FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM
LISTING SERVICE
LISTING No.
7300-0026:0217
Page 1 of 1
CATEGORY:
7300 -- FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT ACCESSORIES/MISC. DEVICES
LISTEE:
Simplex100 Simplex Drive, Westminster, MA 01441-0001
Contact: Jim Goyette (978) 731-8580 Fax (978) 731-8881
Email: jgoyette@tycoint.com
DESIGN:
Models 4098-9780,-9780E,-9789, -9789E, 9789TSP, -9789TTP, -9791, -9791E, -9791TSP,
9791TTP,-9792, -9792E, -9792TSP, 9792TTP, -9793, -9793E, -9793TSP, -9793TTP, -9794,
-9794TSP, -9794TTP, -9795, -9795TSP, -9795TTP, -9796, -9796TSP, -9796TTP;
GSA4098-9780, -9792, -9793, -9795 and -9796 smoke detector bases. These bases act as
an interface between the sensor and the MAPNET controller. Bases are intended for use with
the following units: Models 4098-9714 and GSA4098-9714 series photoelectric smoke
detector (CSFM Listing No. 7272-0026:218); Model 4098-9717 ionization smoke detector
(CSFM Listing No. 7271-0026:231); and Models 4098-9733, GSA4098-9733, *4098-9734 and
*GSA4098-9734 heat detectors (CSFM Listing No. 7270-0026:216). Models 4098-9795,
-9795TSP, -9795TTP, -9796, -9796TSP, -9796TTP; GSA4098-9795, and -9796 are only
intended for use with Models 4098-9754 or GSA4098-9754 photoelectric smoke detector
(CSFM Listing No.7272-0026:218). Refer to listee’s printed data sheet for additional detailed
product description and operational considerations.
INSTALLATION:
In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances
and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.
MARKING:
Listee's name, model number, electrical rating, and UL label.
APPROVAL:
Listed as detector bases for use with listee's separately listed compatible fire alarm control
units. Refer to listee’s Installation Instruction Manual for details.
Models 4098-9794, -9794TSP, -9794TTP, -9795, -9795TSP, -9795TTP; and GSA4098-9795
employ a sounder, which is also suitable for use as a fire alarm audible signaling device.
These base/sounders CAN NOT produce the temporal code pattern in accordance with
NFPA 72, 2002 Edition. If this temporal code is required, the sounder/base unit must be
used with the control unit that can produce the temporal pattern.
*Rev. 02-06-14 gt
This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed
the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not
an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct
operational requirements or installation criteria.
Refer to listee’s data sheet, installation instructions and/or other
Date Issued:
July 01, 2015
Authorized By:
JAMES PARSEGIAN, Program Coordinator
Fire Engineering Division
Listing Expires
June 30, 2016
Notification
Series DSM Sync Modules
Series DSM
Description
The Wheelock Series DSM Sync Modules are utilized with the
Series Exceder, Series AS/AH, Series RSS, Series RSSP, Series
SLM and selected strobe applications with other Wheelock
combination appliances.
When used with Series AS Audible Strobes and/or Series
Exceder Horn Strobes, the DSM Sync Modules provide
independent operation of synchronized temporal pattern (code
3) horn and synchronized strobe flash, as well as the ability to
silence the horn while maintaining the strobe flash. while using
only a single pair of wires. The DSM-12/24 Sync Modules control either a Class A or two (2) Class B NAC circuits.
FIRE ALARM
CONTROL PANEL
(FACP)
Series PS
OR
OTHER POWER
BOOSTERS
Features
•
Approvals include: UL Standard 1971, ULC, New York City (MEA), California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) and Chicago (BFP)
•
Uniquely designed to accept an independent strobe and audible input from the FACP and convert to a single output that connects to Wheelock’s Series AS or Series NS family of audible strobes
•  Series DSM Sync Modules can also be used to synchronize Wheelock’s Series Exceder, RSS, RSSP and SLM Sync
Strobes
•
3 ampere per circuit current handling at 12 or 24 VDC
•
Low operating current draw
•
Compatible with all standard fire alarm control panels
•
Meets the NFPA-72 requirement for Temporal Pattern when used with the Series AS/AH and/or Series Exceder
•
3 year warranty
DSM
DSM Connection Diagram with Power Booster
UL
®
E5946
THE CITY OF
NEW YORK
DEPARTMENT OF BUILDINGS
151-92-E
7300-0785:132
AS/AH, HS, HS4/HS
ST, RSS, RSSP,
E w/STB, ET w/STB,
CH w/STB
APPLIANCES
Table1: Sync Module (DSM) Current Requirements (AMPS)
UL
Voltage
ULC
Voltage
Rated Average
Current
Rated Peak
Current
Rated Inrush
Current
In1/In2 Audible In1/In2 Audible In1/In2 Audible
8.0 VDC
10.5 VDC
0.019
0.004
0.055
0.004
0.150
0.016
12.0 VDC
12.0 VDC
0.020
0.004
0.064
0.004
0.170
0.019
24.0 VDC
24.0 VDC
0.035
0.008
0.080
0.008
0.342
0.030
33.0 VDC
33.0 VDC
0.045
0.010
0.090
0.010
0.470
0.040
8.0 VRMS 8.0 VRMS
0.028
0.005
0.107
0.008
0.210
0.016
12.0 VRMS 12.0 VRMS 0.030
0.006
0.103
0.009
0.240
0.019
24.0 VRMS 24.0 VRMS 0.048
0.010
0.145
0.015
0.480
0.033
33.0 VRMS 31.0 VRMS 0.062
0.012
0.175
0.022
0.685
0.056
NOTE: All CAUTIONS and WARNINGS are identified by the symbol
. All warnings are printed in bold capital letters.
WARNING: PLEASE READ THESE SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE USING, SPECIFYING
OR APPLYING THIS PRODUCT. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH ANY OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS, CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS COULD RESULT
IN IMPROPER APPLICATION, INSTALLATION AND/OR OPERATION OF THESE PRODUCTS IN AN EMERGENCY SITUATION, WHICH COULD
RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE, AND SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO YOU AND/OR OTHERS.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THE TOTAL CURRENT REQUIRED BY ALL APPLIANCES THAT ARE CONNECTED TO A SM OR DSM DOES
NOT EXCEED 3.0A OR EXCEED THE RATING OF THE FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL’S PRIMARY AND SECONDARY POWER SOURCES AND
NAC CIRCUITS. OVERLOADING THESE SOURCES COULD RESULT IN LOSS OF POWER AND FAILURE TO ALERT OCCUPANTS DURING AN
EMERGENCY, WHICH COULD RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE AND SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO YOU AND/OR OTHERS.
When calculating the total current, use Tables 1& 2 to determine the highest value of “Rated Average Current” for the SM or DSM (across the listed voltage range), then add this value to the total current for any other appliances powered by the same source and include any required safety factors. Refer
to Instruction Sheet for addtional information.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT ALL FUSES USED ON NAC CIRCUITS ARE RATED TO HANDLE THE MAXIMUM INRUSH OR PEAK CURRENT
FROM ALL APPLIANCES ON THOSE CIRCUITS. FAILURE TO DO THIS MAY RESULT IN LOSS OF POWER TO THE NAC CIRCUIT AND THE
FAILURE OF ALL APPLIANCES ON THAT CIRCUIT TO OPERATE, WHICH COULD RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE AND SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO YOU AND/OR OTHERS.
Table 3: Current Consumption DSM Modules
Outpurt Circuit Description of SM/DSM Module
Class “B” with Audible Silence SM
DSM
Module Module
Ref. Fig.
(dual circuit)
Y
1
Class “B” with No Audible Silence (dual circuit)
Y
2
Class “A” with Audible Silence (single circuit)
Y
3
Class “A” with No Audible Silence (single circuit)
Y
4
Note: DSM Dual Sync Modules are rated for 3.0 amperes per circuit. The maximum number of interconnected DSM modules is
twenty (20).
CAUTION: Use DSM Sync Modules only on NAC circuits with continuously applied voltage. Do not use DSM Sync Modules on
coded or interrupted NAC circuits in which the applied voltage is cycled on and off.
CAUTION: Power Boosters may be used in conjunction with the DSM Sync Modules only in the order shown below. Only one DSM
Sync Module shall be allowed on a NAC circuit. Do not connect Power Booster to the NAC circuit after the one DSM Sync Module.
Exception: The Wheelock Power Booster can be connected either before or after the DSM Sync Module. Refer to Power Booster
instruction manual for proper application and installation.
FIG. 2 DUAL CLASS “B” CIRCUIT WITH NO AUDIBLE
SILENCE FEATURE
FIG. 1 DUAL CLASS “B” CIRCUIT WITH AUDIBLE
SILENCE FEATURE
FIG. 3 SINGLE CLASS “A” CIRCUIT WITH
AUDIBLE SILENCE FEATURE
FIG. 4 SINGLE CLASS “A” CIRCUIT WITHOUT AUDIBLE
SILENCE FEATURE
Notes
1. Non-Sync Appliances can be installed before or after a DSM. If the Non-Sync appliance requires audible silence, four wire connection is necessary with the strobe circuit connected before the DSM NAC circuit, and the audible leads connected to a silenceable NAC circuit from the FACP.
2. The audible appliance produces a momentary interruption (approximately 25ms) each time the strobes flash.
3. Circuit #2 may be omitted if only 1 circuit is required when using the DSM.
4. Non-Sync Audible Appliances can be installed on the audible NAC. Be aware of the current requirement for the SM or DSM module. See table 3.
Specifications and Ordering Information
Model
Input
Order
Voltage
Code
VDC
DSM-12/24-R***
6374
12
24
Average
Current
@ 12 or
24 VDC
UL
Max*
Mounting
Options**
0.020
0.035
0.026
0.055
W
W
R = Red
* RMS current ratings are per UL average RMS method. UL max
current rating is the maximum RMS current within the listed voltage range (16-33v for 24v units). For strobes the UL max current
is usually at the minimum listed voltage (16v for 24v units). For
audibles the max current is usually at the maximum listed voltage
(33v for 24v units). For unfiltered FWR ratings, see installation
instructions.
** Refer to Data sheet # S7000 for Mounting Options.
*** The maximum number of interconnected DSM modules is twenty (20).
*** The total distance from the first to the last DSM shall not exceed 1,000 feet of #18 AWG wire. Use only #18 AWG wire.
WARNING: THese appliances were tested to the operating voltage limits of 8-33 volts using filtered dc or unfiltered
full-wave rectified (fwr). do not apply 80% and 110% of these voltage values for system operation. THE APPLICATION OF
IMPROPER VOLTAGE MAY RESULT IN DEGRADED OPERATION OR DAMAGE TO THESE PRODUCTS, WHICH COULD RESULT IN PROPERTY
DAMAGE AND SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO YOU AND/OR OTHERS.
Wheelock products must be used within their published specifications and must be PROPERLY specified, applied, installed, operated,
maintained and operationally tested in accordance with their installation instructions at the time of installation and at least twice a
year or more often and in accordance with local, state and federal codes, regulations and laws. Specification, application, installation,
operation, maintenance and testing must be performed by qualified personnel for proper operation in accordance with all of the latest
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL), National Electrical Code (NEC), Occupational Safety and
Health Administration (OSHA), local, state, county, province, district, federal and other applicable building and fire standards, guidelines,
regulations, laws and codes including, but not limited to, all appendices and amendments and the requirements of the local authority
having jurisdiction (AHJ).
WARNING: CONTACT WHEELOCK FOR “INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS”
(P83177-DSM) AND “GENERAL INFORMATION” SHEET ON THESE PRODUCTS. These documents do undergo periodic changes. It is important
that you have current information on these products. These materials contain important information that should be read prior to specifying
or installing these products including:
• TOTAL CURRENT REQUIRED BY ALL APPLIANCES CONNECTED TO SYSTEM SECONDARY POWER SOURCES.
• FUSE RATINGS ON NAC CIRCUITS TO HANDLE MAXIMUM INRUSH OR PEAK CURRENTS FROM ALLAPPLIANCES ON THOSE NAC CIRCUITS.
• COMPOSITE FLASH RATE FROM MULTIPLE STROBES WITHIN A PERSON’S FIELD OF VIEW.
• THE VOLTAGE APPLIED TO THESE PRODUCTS MUST BE WITHIN THEIR RATED IN PUT VOLTAGE RANGE.
• INSTALLATION IN OFFICE AREAS AND OTHER SPECIFICATION AND INSTALLATION ISSUES.
• USE STROBES ONLY ON NAC CIRCUITS WITH CONTINUOUSLY APPLIED OPERATING VOLTAGE. DO NOT USE STROBE ON CODED OR INTERRUPTED NAC CIRCUITS IN WHICH THE APPLIED VOLTAGE IS CYCLED ON AND OFF AS THE STROBE MAY NOT FLASH.
Architects and Engineers Specifications
The sync modules shall be Wheelock Series DSM Sync Modules. Series DSM Sync Modules shall be the master controllers for Wheelock
Series Exceder, AS/AH, RSS, RSSP and appliances where a synchronized audible/visual audible or visual only appliance is specified.
All modules shall be UL listed under Standard 464. Series DSM modules shall be designed to interface with Series AS Audible Strobe
Appliances and Horn Strobe Appliances to produce a synchronized temporal (Code 3) horn as well as synchronized strobe flash on a
two-wire alarm circuit. Other synchronized products are the Wheelock Series Exceder, RSS, RSSP, SLM visual only appliances and
Series AH and Exceder Horn Appliances.
DSM modules shall provide an additional strobe circuit input/output for control of either two Class “B” NAC circuits or a single Class “A”
NAC circuit. Upon activation of the audible silence function at the Fire Alarm Control Panel, the audible signal component of Series AS
Audible Strobe and/or the Series NS Horn Stobe may be silenced while maintaining strobe activation.
DSM module shall be DSM-12/24 for control of either Class A two (2) Class B NAC circuits. The DSM dual circuit version shall provide
the additional capability of “daisy-chaining”, that is, the ability to interconnect multiple DSM’s for synchronous horn and strobe operation
on multiple NAC circuits. Interconnection capability shall be for a maximum of 40 NAC circuits. All modules shall operate on either 12
or 24 VDC. The DSM 12/24 shall be .020 amperes @ 12 VDC and .035 amperes @ 24 VDC. The dual circuit DSM Sync Module shall
be capable of handling a load of 3 amperes per NAC circuit at 12 or 24 VDC.
All versions shall be polarized for DC supervision and shall incorporate screw terminals for in/out field wiring of #18 to #12 AWG wire
size. DSM Sync modules shall mount to a 4-11/16” x 2-1/8” deep backbox.
NOTE: Due to continuous development of our products, specifications and offerings are subject to change without notice in
accordance with Wheelock Inc. standard terms and conditions.
WE ENCOURAGE AND SUPPORT NICET CERTIFICATION
3 YEAR WARRANTY
S3000 DSM 06/11
NJ Location
273 Branchport Ave.
Long Branch, NJ 07740
P: 800-631-2148
F: 732-222-8707
www.coopernotification.com
Cooper Notification is
Notification
CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION
OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL
FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM
LISTING SERVICE
LISTING No.
7300-0785:0132
Page 1 of 1
CATEGORY:
7300 -- FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT ACCESSORIES/MISC. DEVICES
LISTEE:
Cooper Wheelock Inc.7246 16th St. E., Ste. 105, Sarasota, FL 34243
Contact: Tom Conover (941) 487-2336
Email: thomas.conover@cooperindustries.com
DESIGN:
Models SM-12/24, SMX-12/24, DSM-12/24 and DSMX-12/24 Synchronized Control Modules.
Models SM-12/24 and DSM-12/24 may be followed by -R, -W, -X or -S. Refer to listee's data
sheet for additional detailed product description and operational considerations.
RATING:
8-33 VDC*
INSTALLATION:
In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances
and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.
MARKING:
Listee's name, model number, electrical rating and UL label.
APPROVAL:
Listed as signaling appliances accessory for use with separately listed synchronized strobe
lights. For indoor use only.
*Rev. 05-26-10 bh
This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed
the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not
an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct
operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee’s data sheet, installation instructions and/or other
Date Issued:
July 01, 2015
Authorized By:
JAMES PARSEGIAN, Program Coordinator
Fire Engineering Division
Listing Expires
June 30, 2016
Description
The Wheelock patented 2-wire Series AS Audible Strobe
Appliances and Series AH Audibles offer more features with
low current draw.
Strobe options for wall mount models include 1575cd or the
selectable candela settings of 15/30/75/110cd, or the high
Ceiling mount models incorporate Wheelock’s patented MCC
selectable 115/177cd.
The audible provides a selectable choice of either a
continuous horn or temporal pattern (Code 3) when
constant voltage from a Fire Alarm Panel (FACP) is
applied. Each tone has 3 dBA settings to choose from.
When used with the Wheelock Series DSM Sync Modules,
Wheelock Power Supplies or other manufacturers panels
incorporating the Wheelock Patented Sync Protocol,
synchronization of the continuous horn tone provides the
temporal (code 3) tone (mandated by NFPA 72) simultaneously
for all audible appliances. This ensures a distinct temporal
(code 3) pattern when 2 or more audibles are within hearing
distance. If not synchronized the temporal sound could overlap
and not be distinctive. At the same time the strobes will be
synchronized. This provides the ability to comply with ADA
guidelines concerning photosensitive epilepsy and the NFPA
standards when installing 2 or more visual appliances within
EXT ØÑÎÒ
HORN
ÛÈÌ
Features
Approvals include: UL Standard 1971, UL Standard 464
New York City (MEA), California State Fire Marshal (CSFM),
Factory Mutual (FM), and Chicago (BFP). See approvals by
ADA/NFPA/UFC/ANSI Compliant
Wall mount models are available with Field Selectable
Candela models) or 1575cd (single candela model)
candela settings of 15/30/75/95cd or 115/177cd (multi-candela
ceiling models)
Selectable Continuous Horn or Temporal (Code 3).
3 Selectable dBA settings (99, 95 and 90 dBA) in both tones
Patented 2-Wire Audible Strobe Appliance.
Patented Universal Mounting Plate
Weatherproof models are available for outdoor use
voltage range
12 and 24 VDC models with wide UL “Regulated Voltage
Synchronize using the Wheelock Sync Modules or panels with
built-in Wheelock Patented Sync Protocol
is achieved by using only 2 wire.
F orW ea t
h erproof S eriesA S , S eeD a t
a sh eetS 9 004
ÌØÛ Ý×ÌÇ ÑÚ
ÒÛÉ ÇÑÎÕ
ÜÛÐßÎÌÓÛÒÌ ÑÚ ÞË×ÔÜ×Ò ÙÍ
E5946
S5391
151-92-E
General Notes:
VDC
VDC/FWR
AS-24MCW
24
16.0 - 33.0
15/30/75/110
AS-24MCCH
24
16.0 - 33.0
115/177
AS-241575W
24
AS-121575W
12
AS-24MCC
24
16.0 - 33.0
AS-24MCWH
24
16.0 - 33.0
ASWP-2475W
24
16.0 - 33.0
Table 3: Average RMS Current
16.0 - 33.0
High
Continuous
Horn
91
99
Medium
95
15 (75 on Axis)
Low
90
15/30/75/95
High
99
Medium
95
15 (75 on Axis)
Code 3 Horn
Low
75 @ -31°F
79
90
ÛÈÌ ØÑÎÒ
24 VDC Models
1575cd
High (99)
dBA
Med (95)
dBA
Low (90)
dBA
15cd
30cd
75cd
110cd 135cd
15cd
0.080
UL max*
0.121
0.080
0.060
UL max*
0.043
0.107
0.074
UL max*
0.021
0.100
75cd
0.200
0.267
0.355
0.095
0.221
Med (95)
dBA
Low (90)
dBA
0.163
0.260
UL max*
0.192
0.320
12 vdc
0.076
0.195
UL max*
UL max*
0.275
0.039
0.175
0.265
177cd
0.355
0.110
0.190
0.105
0.253
0.340
0.465
0.245
0.335
0.460
0.122
0.074
0.201
0.113
0.269
0.340
0.465
0.263
0.335
0.460
#
12 vdc
12 vdc
115cd
0.066
12 VDC Models
High (99)
dBA
95cd
0.088
0.125
0.033
30cd
24.0 VDC
0.105
UL Max*
0.155
0.150
* RMS current ratings are per UL average RMS method. UL max current
rating is the maximum RMS current within the listed voltage range (16-33v
for 24v units). For strobes the UL max current is usually at the minimum
listed voltage (16v for 24v units). For audibles the max current is usually
ratings, see installation instructions.
Wiring Diagrams #
ÚÎÑÓ
ÐÎÛÝÛÜ×ÒÙ
ßÐÐÔ×ßÒÝÛ
ÑÎ ÚßÝÐ
ÌÑ ÒÛÈÌ
õ
ó ßÐÐÔ×ßÒÝÛ
ÑÎ ÛÑÔÎ
õ
ó
ß«¼·¾´» ÒßÝ Ý·®
ò ÜÍÓ ýï
ͧ²½
ͬ®±¾» ÒßÝ Ý·®ò
Ú
ß
Ý
Ð
ó
õ
ßÍ
ÑËÌÐËÌÍ
ïóì
ìóÝÔßÍÍ
þÞþ
ÑÎ
îóÝÔßÍÍ
þßþ
ÍÌ
ß«¼·¾´» ÒßÝ Ý·®
ͬ®±¾» ÒßÝ Ý·®ò
õ
ó
ò
ͧ²½
ͧ²½
ÛÑÔÎ
ßÍ
ßÍ
ßÍ
ßÍ
ßÍ
ÜÍÓ ýî
õ
ó
ÜÍÓ
ýí
ß«¼·¾´» ÒßÝ Ý·® ò
ͬ®±¾» ÒßÝ Ý·®ò
ßÍ
õó
ÜÍÓ ×²¬»®½±²²»½¬·²¹ ©·®·²¹ -¸±©²ò Ó¿¨·³«³ ±º
¬©»²¬§ øîð÷
ßÍ
ÍÌ
#
For detail using DSM Sync Module refer to Data Sheet
wiring informationon the power supplies refer to Installation
ÍÌ
ßÍ
Í»®·»- ÐÍ
б©»® Í«°°´·»-
VDC VDC
AS-24MCW-FR
AS-24MCW-FW
9024 15/30/75/110
9025 15/30/75/110
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
AS-24MCWH-FR
AS-24MCWH-FW
3469
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
AS-241575W-FR
AS-121575W-FR
7405 15 (75 on Axis)
7410 15 (75 on Axis)
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
AS-24MCC-FR
AS-24MCC-FW
3161
3162
15/30/75/95
15/30/75/95
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
AS-24MCCH-FW
3467
ASWP-2475W-FR** 9012
115/177
75 @ -31°F
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
I (see Data Sheet S9004) X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
AH-24-R
AH-24-W
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
AH-12-R
AH-12-W
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
AH-24WP-R**
AH-12WP-R**
7416
7415
K
K
equals. The Series AS Audible be listed for UL Standard 1971 (Emergency Devices for the Hearing-Impaired) for Indoor Fire Protection
Service. The Series AH Audible shall be UL Listed under Standard 464 (Fire Protective Signaling). Both shall meet the requirements
of FCC Part 15 Class B. All inputs shall be compatible with standard reverse polarity supervision of circuit wiring by a Fire Alarm
Control Panel (FACP).
of continuous or temporal (Code 3) audible outputs.
candela on-axis is required (e.g. ADA compliance).
When synchronization is required, the appliance shall be compatible with Wheelock’s DSM Sync Modules, Wheelock Power Supplies
or other manufacturers panels with built-in Wheelock Patented Sync Protocol. The strobes shall not drift out of synchronization at any
time during operation. If the sync module or Power Supply fails to operate, (i.e., contacts remain closed), the strobe shall revert to a
activation when used with Wheelock synchronization.
The Series AS Audible Strobe and Series AH Audible shall incorporate a Patented Universal Mounting Plate that shall allow mounting
to a single-gang, double-gang, 4-inch square, 100mm European type backboxes, or the SHBB Surface Backbox. If required, an NATP
3 YEAR WARRANTY
ÒÖ Ô±½¿¬·±²
îéí Þ®¿²½¸°±®¬ ߪ»ò
Ô±²¹ Þ®¿²½¸ô ÒÖ ðééìð
Ðæ èððóêíïóîïìè
Úæ éíîóîîîóèéðé
©©©ò½±±°»®²±¬·º·½¿¬·±²ò½±³
CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION
OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL
FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM
LISTING SERVICE
LISTING No.
7125-0785:0131
Page 1 of 2
CATEGORY:
7125 -- FIRE ALARM DEVICES FOR THE HEARING IMPAIRED
LISTEE:
Cooper Wheelock Inc.7246 16th St. E., Ste. 105, Sarasota, FL 34243
Contact: Tom Conover (941) 487-2336
Email: thomas.conover@cooperindustries.com
DESIGN:
Models AS-1215, -2415, -1230, -2430, -121575, -241575, -2475 and - 24110 audible/strobes
for the hearing impaired followed by any three alpha/numeric characters indicating lens
orientation, lettering and color.
Models AS-1215W, -2415W, -1230W, -2430W, -121575W, -241575W, -2475W and - 24110W
audible/strobes for the hearing impaired followed by any three alpha/numeric characters
indicating lens orientation, lettering and color. These units with suffix -W are for wall mount
only. *Models AS-121575W and AS-241575W lens color may be white, red, blue, green, or
amber.
Models AS-2415C, -2430C, -2475C and -24100C audible/strobes for the hearing impaired
followed by two alpha/numeric characters indicating lens lettering, orientation and color.
These units are intended for ceiling mount only.
Exterior
Horn
Model AH-12, -24, AH-12WP, -24WP audible appliances (no strobe), followed by an alpha or
numeric character indicating product color.
Model AS-24MCW and AS-24MCC audible/strobe, followed by any two alpha or numeric
character indicating lettering and product color. *Lens color may be white, red, blue, green,
or amber.
Models ASWP-2475W and *ASWP-2475C audible/strobe with integral private mode
fire/emergency visual signaling for non-hearing impaired applications. Lens color may be
white, red, blue, green, and amber. Both models are suitable for outdoor use when mounted
on the Model WPBB back box.
Models AS-24MCWH, AS-24MCCH, *ASWP-24MCWH, and *ASWP-24MCCH
audible/strobes for the hearing impaired followed by two alpha/numeric characters indicating
lens lettering and product color. Units with suffix CH are for ceiling mount only. Units with
suffix WH are for wall mount only. *Lens color may be white, red, blue, green, or amber.
Refer to the listee's data sheet for detailed product description and operational
considerations.
*Rev. 10-01-07
This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed
the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not
an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct
operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee’s data sheet, installation instructions and/or other
Date Issued:
July 01, 2015
Authorized By:
JAMES PARSEGIAN, Program Coordinator
Fire Engineering Division
Listing Expires
June 30, 2016
Listing No.
7125-0785:0131
Page 2 of 2
RATING:
Electrical:
8-17.5/16-33 VDC/VFWR
Flash Rate: 60 flashes/minute
Candela: 15:15cd,1575:15/75cd,30:30cd,75:75cd,95:95cd,100:100cd, 110:110cd
MCW: Selectable 15cd, 30cd, 75cd,110cd
MCC: Selectable 15cd, 30cd,75cd,95cd
MCWH: Selectable 135cd,185cd (65cd, 90cd at -40 C)
MCCH: Selectable 115cd,177cd (50cd, 75cd at -40 C)
INSTALLATION:
In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances
and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Models ASWP-2475W,
ASWP-24MCWH, AS-24MCW and AS-24MCWH are for wall mount only. Models
ASWP-2475C, ASWP-24MCCH, AS-24MCCH, AND AS-24MCC are for ceiling mount only.
Models with suffix -W or WH are for wall mount only. Models with suffix -C or -CH are for
ceiling mount only.
MARKING:
Listee's name, model number, electrical/candela rating, and UL label.
APPROVAL:
Listed as audible and audible/visual signaling devices suitable for the hearing impaired when
used in conjunction with separately listed electrically compatible fire alarm control units. For
indoor use only except Models AH-12WP, AH-24WP, *ASWP-2475W, ASWP-2475C,
ASWP-24MCWH, and ASWP-24MCCH audible appliances are suitable for indoor/outdoor.
For synchronization, Models AS Series must be used with Model SM-12/24, SMX-12/24,
DSM-12/24 or DSMX-12/24 sync control module (CSFM Listing No. 7300-0785:132). Refer to
listee’s Installation Instruction Manual for details .
These appliances can generate a distinctive three- pulse Temporal Pattern Fire Alarm
Evacuation Signal (for total evacuation) in accordance with NFPA 72, 2002 Edition.
NOTE:
Models AH-12, AH-24, -12WP and -24WP audible devices are not suitable for the hearing
impaired applications.
*Rev. 10-01-07
This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed
the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not
an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct
operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee’s data sheet, installation instructions and/or other
Date Issued:
July 01, 2015
Authorized By:
JAMES PARSEGIAN, Program Coordinator
Fire Engineering Division
Listing Expires
June 30, 2016
Wheelock® ExcederTM Series
Notification
TM
Strobe, Horn Strobe, and Horn
Notification Appliances
Ceiling
Wall
Description:
The Wheelock® ExcederTM Series of notification appliances feature
a sleek modern design that will please building owners with reduced
total cost of ownership. Installers will benefit from its comprehensive
feature list, including the most candela options in one appliance,
low current draw, no tools needed for setting changes, voltage test
points, 12/24 VDC operation, universal mounting base and multiple
mounting options for both new and retrofit construction.
The Wheelock® ExcederTM Series incorporates high reliability and
high efficiency optics to minimize current draw allowing for a greater
number of appliances on the notification appliance circuit. All strobe
models feature an industry first of 8 candela settings on a single
appliance. Models with an audible feature 3 sound settings (90, 95,
99 dB). All switches to change settings, can be set without the use
of a tool and are located behind the appliance to prevent tampering.
Wall models feature voltage test points to take readings with a
voltage meter for troubleshooting and AHJ inspection.
The Wheelock® ExcederTM Series of wall and ceiling notification
appliances feature a Universal Mounting Base (UMB) designed
to simplify the installation and testing of horns, strobes, and
combination horn strobes. The separate universal mounting
base can be pre-wired to allow full testing of circuit wiring before
the appliance is installed and the surface is finished. It comes
complete with a Contact Cover for protection against dirt, dust, paint
and damage to the contacts. The Contact Cover also acts as a
shunting device to allow pre-wire testing for common wiring issues.
The Contact Cover is polarized to prevent it from being installed
incorrectly and prevents the appliance from being installed while
it is on the UMB. When the Contact Cover is removed the circuit
will show an open until the appliance is installed. The UMB allows
for consistent installation and easy replacement of appliances if
required. Wall models provide an optional locking screw for extra
secure installation, while the ceiling models provide a captivated
screw to prevent the screw from falling during installation.
- Save up to 48% in current draw*
- Up to 9 models now in 1 appliance
- Save up to 14% cost of installation**
***
5
Compatibility and Requirements
- Synchronize using the Wheelock® Sync Modules or panels with built-in Wheelock® Patented Sync Protocol
- Compatible with UL “Regulated Voltage” using filtered VDC or unfiltered VRMS input voltage
- Strobes produce 1 flash per second over the “Regulated Voltage” range
* Compared to competitive models
** Compared to previous models
*** Patented
***
NOTE: All CAUTIONS and WARNINGS are identified by the symbol
. All warnings are printed in bold capital letters.
WARNING: PLEASE READ THESE SPECIFICATIONS AND ASSOCIATED INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE USING, SPECIFYING
OR APPLYING THIS PRODUCT. VISIT WWW.COOPERNOTIFICATION.COM OR CONTACT COOPER NOTIFICATION FOR THE CURRENT INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH ANY OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS, CAUTIONS OR WARNINGS COULD RESULT IN IMPROPER APPLICATION,
INSTALLATION AND/OR OPERATION OF THESE PRODUCTS IN AN EMERGENCY SITUATION, WHICH COULD RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE, AND
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO YOU AND/OR OTHERS.
General Notes:
General Notes:
• Strobes are designed to flash at 1 flash per second minimum over their “Regulated Voltage Range”.
• All candela ratings represent minimum effective strobe intensity based on UL Standard 1971.
• Series Exceder Strobe products are Listed under UL Standards 1971 and 464 for indoor use with a temperature range of 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) and
maximum humidity of 93% (± 2%) UL 464 (85% UL 1971).
• Series Exceder horns are under UL Standard 464 for audible signal appliances (Indoor use only).
Low Current Draw = Fewer Power Supplies
Strobe Ratings per UL Standard 1971
UL Max Current*
24 VDC / 24 FWR
Model
Regulated Voltage
Range VDC
15
15/75
30
ST
8.0-33.0
0.057 0.070 0.085
STC
8.0-33.0
0.061
60
75
95
110
115
0.135 0.163 0.182
0.085 0.103 0.135 0.163
12 VDC
135
150
177
0.205
0.182
185
15
15/75
0.253 0.110 0.140
0.205 0.253
0.110
Horn Strobe Ratings per UL 1971 & Anechoic at 24 VDC
UL Max Current* at Anechoic 99 dBA
24 VDC
Model
Regulated Voltage
Range VDC
15
15/75
30
HS
8.0-33.0
0.082 0.095 0.102
HSC
8.0-33.0
0.082
60
75
95
110
115
0.148 0.176 0.197
0.102 0.141 0.148 0.176
135
150
12 VDC
177
0.242
0.197
185
15
15/75
0.282 0.125 0.159
0.242 0.282
0.125
UL Max Current* at Anechoic 95 dBA
24 VDC
Model
Regulated Voltage
Range VDC
15
15/75
30
HS
8.0-33.0
0.073 0.083 0.087
HSC
8.0-33.0
0.073
60
75
95
110
12 VDC
115
0.139 0.163 0.186
0.087 0.128 0.139 0.163
135
150
177
0.230
0.186
185
15
15/75
0.272 0.122 0.153
0.230 0.272
0.122
UL Max Current* at Anechoic 90 dBA
24 VDC
Model
Regulated Voltage
Range VDC
15
15/75
30
HS
8.0-33.0
0.065 0.075 0.084
HSC
8.0-33.0
0.065
60
75
95
110
12 VDC
115
0.136 0.157 0.184
0.084 0.120 0.136 0.157
135
150
177
0.226
0.184
185
15
15/75
0.267 0.120 0.148
0.226 0.267
0.120
Horn Ratings per UL Anechoic
Regulated Voltage
Range VDC
99 dB 95 dB 90 dB
HN
16-33.0
0.064 0.044 0.022
HNC
16-33.0
0.084 0.044 0.022
HN
8.0-17.5
0.047 0.026 0.017
HNC
8.0-17.5
0.047 0.026 0.017
Model
* UL max current rating is the maximum RMS current within the listed voltage range (16-33 VDC for 24 VDC units). For strobes the
UL max current is usually at the minimum listed voltage (16 VDC for 24 VDC units). For audibles the max current is usually at the
maximum listed voltage (33 VDC for 24 VDC units). For unfiltered ratings, see installation instructions.
Specification & Ordering Information
Strobe
Candela
Sync w/
DSM or
Wheelock Power
Supplies
12/24 VDC*
HSR
15/1575/30/75/95/110/135/185
X
X
HSW
15/1575/30/75/95/110/135/185
X
X
HSRC
15/30/60/75/95/115/150/177
X
X
HSWC
15/30/60/75/95/115/150/177
X
X
15/1575/30/75/95/110/135/185
X
X
15/1575/30/75/95/110/135/185
X
X
15/30/60/75/95/115/150/177
X
X
15/30/60/75/95/115/150/177
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Model
Mounting
Options
STR
STW
STRC
STWC
Horn
HNR
HNW
HNRC
HNWC
*12 VDC models feature 15 & 15/75 settings
1 gang, 2 gang, 4” sq, 3.5” octal & 4” octal boxes
Strobes
8 candelas on 1 device
Easy to remember model codes
Horn Strobes
UMB**
UMB**
UMB**
UMB**
UMB**
UMB**
UMB**
UMB**
UMB**
UMB**
UMB**
UMB**
**UMB = Universal Mounting Base
Model Legend
HN = Horn
ST = Strobe
HS = Horn Strobe
C = Ceiling Mount
W = White
R = Red
A = Agent Lettering
(Strobes only)
AL = Alert Lettering
(Strobes only)
N = No Lettering
(Strobes only)
Example 1: STRC = Strobe, Red, Ceiling Mount
Example 2: HSR = Horn Strobe, Red, Wall Mount
Example 3: HSW = Horn Strobe, White, Wall Mount
Example 4: STW-AL = Strobe, White, Wall Mount, Alert Lettering
Example: HSR
*UMB
Voltage test points for quick
troubleshooting and easy spot
checking (wall models only)
8 candela settings
Example: HSWC
Contact Cover
Common base for wall and ceiling with 5
mounting options
NOTE: Due to continuous development of our products, specifications and offerings are subject to change without notice in accordance
with Cooper Wheelock Inc., dba Cooper Notification standard terms and conditions.
Architects and Engineers Specifications
The notification appliances shall be Wheelock® Exceder™ Series HS Audible Strobe appliances, Series ST Visual Strobe appliances
and Series HN Audible appliances or approved equals. The Series HS and ST Strobes shall be listed for UL Standard 1971 (Emergency
Devices for the Hearing-Impaired) for Indoor Fire Protection Service. The Series HS and HN Audibles shall be UL Listed under Standard
464 (Fire Protective Signaling). All Series shall meet the requirements of FCC Part 15 Class B. All inputs shall be compatible with
standard reverse polarity supervision of circuit wiring by a Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) with the ability to operate from 8 to 33 VDC.
Indoor wall models shall incorporate voltage test points for easy voltage inspection.
The Series HS Audible Strobe and ST Strobe appliances shall produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second over the Regulated
Voltage Range and shall incorporate a Xenon flashtube enclosed in a rugged Lexan® lens. The Series shall be of low current design.
Where Multi-Candela appliances are specified, the strobe intensity shall have 8 field selectable settings at 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110,
135, 185 candela for wall mount and 15, 30, 60, 75, 95, 115, 150, 177 candela for ceiling mount. The selector switch for selecting
the candela shall be tamper resistant. The 15/75 candela strobe shall be specified when 15 candela UL Standard 1971 Listing with
75 candela on-axis is required (e.g. ADA compliance). Appliances with candela settings shall show the candela selection in a visible
location at all times when installed.
The audible shall have a minimum of three (3) field selectable settings for dBA levels and shall have a choice of continuous or temporal
(Code 3) audible outputs.
The Series HS Audible Strobe, ST Strobe and Series HN Audible shall incorporate a patented Universal Mounting Base that shall allow
mounting to a single-gang, double-gang, 4-inch square, 3.5-inch octal, 4-inch octal or 100mm European type back boxes. Two wire
appliance wiring shall be capable of directly connecting to the mounting base. Continuity checking of the entire NAC circuit prior to
attaching any notification appliances shall be allowed. Product shall come with Contact Cover to protect contact springs. Removal of
an appliance shall result in a supervision fault condition by the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). The mounting base shall be the same
base among all horn, strobe, horn strobe, wall and ceiling models. All notification appliances shall be backwards compatible.
The Series HS and ST wall models shall have a low profile measuring 5.24” H x 4.58” W x 2.19” D. Series HN wall shall measure 5.24”
H x 4.58” W x 1.6” D. The Series HSC and STC shall been round and have a low profile with a diameter of 6.68” x 2.63” D. Series
HNC ceiling shall have a diameter of 6.68” x 1.50” D.
When synchronization is required, the appliance shall be compatible with Wheelock®’s DSM Sync Modules, Wheelock® Power Supplies
or other manufacturer’s panels with built-in Wheelock® Patented Sync Protocol. The strobes shall not drift out of synchronization at any
time during operation. If the sync protocol fails to operate, the strobe shall revert to a non-synchronized flash-rate and still maintain (1)
flash per second over its Regulated Voltage Range. The appliance shall also be designed so that the audible signal may be silenced
while maintaining strobe activation when used with Wheelock® synchronization protocol.
Wall Appliances – UL Standard 1971, UL Standard 464, California State Fire Marshal (CSFM), ULC, FM
Ceiling Appliances – UL Standard 1971, UL Standard 464, California State Fire Marshal (CSFM), ULC, FM
WE ENCOURAGE AND SUPPORT NICET CERTIFICATION
3 YEAR WARRANTY
Exceder - Spec Sheet 6/11
NJ Location
273 Branchport Ave.
Long Branch, NJ 07740
P: 800-631-2148
F: 732-222-8707
www.coopernotification.com
Cooper Notification is
Notification
CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION
OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL
FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM
LISTING SERVICE
LISTING No.
7125-0785:0168
Page 1 of 1
CATEGORY:
7125 -- FIRE ALARM DEVICES FOR THE HEARING IMPAIRED
LISTEE:
Cooper Wheelock Inc.7246 16th St. E., Ste. 105, Sarasota, FL 34243
Contact: Tom Conover (941) 487-2336
Email: thomas.conover@cooperindustries.com
DESIGN:
Exceder Series: Models ST strobe, HS horn strobe and HN horn. Model ST is a synchronous
and non-synchronous strobe light. Model HS a visual/audible appliance and Model HN is an
audible signal appliance. All units followed by R (red) or W (white). Additionally, a ‘C’ may be
added for ceiling models and/or a ‘-NR’ may be added for non-resettable models. For non
-NR models and optional ‘S’ for silver fascia may be added*. Refer to listee's data sheet for
additional detailed product description and operational considerations.
RATING:
Electrical: 12 VDC/24VDC/FWR
Candela (wall)*: 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, 135 & 185
Candela (ceiling)*: 15, 30, 60, 75, 95, 115, 150, & 177
INSTALLATION:
In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances
and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. All models are for indoor use
and for wall mount only or ceiling mount only*
MARKING:
Listee's name, model number, electrical/candela rating, and UL label.
APPROVAL:
Listed as horn for fire alarm signaling and strobe, horn /strobe for the hearing impaired when
used with separately listed electrically compatible fire alarm control units. Refer to listee ’s
Installation Instructions Manual for details.
*Rev. 9-24-09 fm
This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed
the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not
an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct
operational requirements or installation criteria.
Refer to listee’s data sheet, installation instructions and/or other
Date Issued:
July 01, 2015
Authorized By:
JAMES PARSEGIAN, Program Coordinator
Fire Engineering Division
Listing Expires
June 30, 2016
Wheelock® ExcederTM Series
Notification
TM
Strobe, Horn Strobe, and Horn
Notification Appliances
Ceiling
Wall
Description:
The Wheelock® ExcederTM Series of notification appliances feature
a sleek modern design that will please building owners with reduced
total cost of ownership. Installers will benefit from its comprehensive
feature list, including the most candela options in one appliance,
low current draw, no tools needed for setting changes, voltage test
points, 12/24 VDC operation, universal mounting base and multiple
mounting options for both new and retrofit construction.
The Wheelock® ExcederTM Series incorporates high reliability and
high efficiency optics to minimize current draw allowing for a greater
number of appliances on the notification appliance circuit. All strobe
models feature an industry first of 8 candela settings on a single
appliance. Models with an audible feature 3 sound settings (90, 95,
99 dB). All switches to change settings, can be set without the use
of a tool and are located behind the appliance to prevent tampering.
Wall models feature voltage test points to take readings with a
voltage meter for troubleshooting and AHJ inspection.
The Wheelock® ExcederTM Series of wall and ceiling notification
appliances feature a Universal Mounting Base (UMB) designed
to simplify the installation and testing of horns, strobes, and
combination horn strobes. The separate universal mounting
base can be pre-wired to allow full testing of circuit wiring before
the appliance is installed and the surface is finished. It comes
complete with a Contact Cover for protection against dirt, dust, paint
and damage to the contacts. The Contact Cover also acts as a
shunting device to allow pre-wire testing for common wiring issues.
The Contact Cover is polarized to prevent it from being installed
incorrectly and prevents the appliance from being installed while
it is on the UMB. When the Contact Cover is removed the circuit
will show an open until the appliance is installed. The UMB allows
for consistent installation and easy replacement of appliances if
required. Wall models provide an optional locking screw for extra
secure installation, while the ceiling models provide a captivated
screw to prevent the screw from falling during installation.
- Save up to 48% in current draw*
- Up to 9 models now in 1 appliance
- Save up to 14% cost of installation**
***
5
Compatibility and Requirements
- Synchronize using the Wheelock® Sync Modules or panels with built-in Wheelock® Patented Sync Protocol
- Compatible with UL “Regulated Voltage” using filtered VDC or unfiltered VRMS input voltage
- Strobes produce 1 flash per second over the “Regulated Voltage” range
* Compared to competitive models
** Compared to previous models
*** Patented
***
NOTE: All CAUTIONS and WARNINGS are identified by the symbol
. All warnings are printed in bold capital letters.
WARNING: PLEASE READ THESE SPECIFICATIONS AND ASSOCIATED INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE USING, SPECIFYING
OR APPLYING THIS PRODUCT. VISIT WWW.COOPERNOTIFICATION.COM OR CONTACT COOPER NOTIFICATION FOR THE CURRENT INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH ANY OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS, CAUTIONS OR WARNINGS COULD RESULT IN IMPROPER APPLICATION,
INSTALLATION AND/OR OPERATION OF THESE PRODUCTS IN AN EMERGENCY SITUATION, WHICH COULD RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE, AND
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO YOU AND/OR OTHERS.
General Notes:
General Notes:
• Strobes are designed to flash at 1 flash per second minimum over their “Regulated Voltage Range”.
• All candela ratings represent minimum effective strobe intensity based on UL Standard 1971.
• Series Exceder Strobe products are Listed under UL Standards 1971 and 464 for indoor use with a temperature range of 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) and
maximum humidity of 93% (± 2%) UL 464 (85% UL 1971).
• Series Exceder horns are under UL Standard 464 for audible signal appliances (Indoor use only).
Low Current Draw = Fewer Power Supplies
Strobe Ratings per UL Standard 1971
UL Max Current*
24 VDC / 24 FWR
Model
Regulated Voltage
Range VDC
15
15/75
30
ST
8.0-33.0
0.057 0.070 0.085
STC
8.0-33.0
0.061
60
75
95
110
115
0.135 0.163 0.182
0.085 0.103 0.135 0.163
12 VDC
135
150
177
0.205
0.182
185
15
15/75
0.253 0.110 0.140
0.205 0.253
0.110
Horn Strobe Ratings per UL 1971 & Anechoic at 24 VDC
UL Max Current* at Anechoic 99 dBA
24 VDC
Model
Regulated Voltage
Range VDC
15
15/75
30
HS
8.0-33.0
0.082 0.095 0.102
HSC
8.0-33.0
0.082
60
75
95
110
115
0.148 0.176 0.197
0.102 0.141 0.148 0.176
135
150
12 VDC
177
0.242
0.197
185
15
15/75
0.282 0.125 0.159
0.242 0.282
0.125
UL Max Current* at Anechoic 95 dBA
24 VDC
Model
Regulated Voltage
Range VDC
15
15/75
30
HS
8.0-33.0
0.073 0.083 0.087
HSC
8.0-33.0
0.073
60
75
95
110
12 VDC
115
0.139 0.163 0.186
0.087 0.128 0.139 0.163
135
150
177
0.230
0.186
185
15
15/75
0.272 0.122 0.153
0.230 0.272
0.122
UL Max Current* at Anechoic 90 dBA
24 VDC
Model
Regulated Voltage
Range VDC
15
15/75
30
HS
8.0-33.0
0.065 0.075 0.084
HSC
8.0-33.0
0.065
60
75
95
110
12 VDC
115
0.136 0.157 0.184
0.084 0.120 0.136 0.157
135
150
177
0.226
0.184
185
15
15/75
0.267 0.120 0.148
0.226 0.267
0.120
Horn Ratings per UL Anechoic
Regulated Voltage
Range VDC
99 dB 95 dB 90 dB
HN
16-33.0
0.064 0.044 0.022
HNC
16-33.0
0.084 0.044 0.022
HN
8.0-17.5
0.047 0.026 0.017
HNC
8.0-17.5
0.047 0.026 0.017
Model
* UL max current rating is the maximum RMS current within the listed voltage range (16-33 VDC for 24 VDC units). For strobes the
UL max current is usually at the minimum listed voltage (16 VDC for 24 VDC units). For audibles the max current is usually at the
maximum listed voltage (33 VDC for 24 VDC units). For unfiltered ratings, see installation instructions.
Specification & Ordering Information
Strobe
Candela
Sync w/
DSM or
Wheelock Power
Supplies
12/24 VDC*
HSR
15/1575/30/75/95/110/135/185
X
X
HSW
15/1575/30/75/95/110/135/185
X
X
HSRC
15/30/60/75/95/115/150/177
X
X
HSWC
15/30/60/75/95/115/150/177
X
X
15/1575/30/75/95/110/135/185
X
X
15/1575/30/75/95/110/135/185
X
X
15/30/60/75/95/115/150/177
X
X
15/30/60/75/95/115/150/177
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Model
Mounting
Options
STR
STW
STRC
STWC
Horn
HNR
HNW
HNRC
HNWC
*12 VDC models feature 15 & 15/75 settings
1 gang, 2 gang, 4” sq, 3.5” octal & 4” octal boxes
Strobes
8 candelas on 1 device
Easy to remember model codes
Horn Strobes
UMB**
UMB**
UMB**
UMB**
UMB**
UMB**
UMB**
UMB**
UMB**
UMB**
UMB**
UMB**
**UMB = Universal Mounting Base
Model Legend
HN = Horn
ST = Strobe
HS = Horn Strobe
C = Ceiling Mount
W = White
R = Red
A = Agent Lettering
(Strobes only)
AL = Alert Lettering
(Strobes only)
N = No Lettering
(Strobes only)
Example 1: STRC = Strobe, Red, Ceiling Mount
Example 2: HSR = Horn Strobe, Red, Wall Mount
Example 3: HSW = Horn Strobe, White, Wall Mount
Example 4: STW-AL = Strobe, White, Wall Mount, Alert Lettering
Example: HSR
*UMB
Voltage test points for quick
troubleshooting and easy spot
checking (wall models only)
8 candela settings
Example: HSWC
Contact Cover
Common base for wall and ceiling with 5
mounting options
NOTE: Due to continuous development of our products, specifications and offerings are subject to change without notice in accordance
with Cooper Wheelock Inc., dba Cooper Notification standard terms and conditions.
Architects and Engineers Specifications
The notification appliances shall be Wheelock® Exceder™ Series HS Audible Strobe appliances, Series ST Visual Strobe appliances
and Series HN Audible appliances or approved equals. The Series HS and ST Strobes shall be listed for UL Standard 1971 (Emergency
Devices for the Hearing-Impaired) for Indoor Fire Protection Service. The Series HS and HN Audibles shall be UL Listed under Standard
464 (Fire Protective Signaling). All Series shall meet the requirements of FCC Part 15 Class B. All inputs shall be compatible with
standard reverse polarity supervision of circuit wiring by a Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) with the ability to operate from 8 to 33 VDC.
Indoor wall models shall incorporate voltage test points for easy voltage inspection.
The Series HS Audible Strobe and ST Strobe appliances shall produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second over the Regulated
Voltage Range and shall incorporate a Xenon flashtube enclosed in a rugged Lexan® lens. The Series shall be of low current design.
Where Multi-Candela appliances are specified, the strobe intensity shall have 8 field selectable settings at 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110,
135, 185 candela for wall mount and 15, 30, 60, 75, 95, 115, 150, 177 candela for ceiling mount. The selector switch for selecting
the candela shall be tamper resistant. The 15/75 candela strobe shall be specified when 15 candela UL Standard 1971 Listing with
75 candela on-axis is required (e.g. ADA compliance). Appliances with candela settings shall show the candela selection in a visible
location at all times when installed.
The audible shall have a minimum of three (3) field selectable settings for dBA levels and shall have a choice of continuous or temporal
(Code 3) audible outputs.
The Series HS Audible Strobe, ST Strobe and Series HN Audible shall incorporate a patented Universal Mounting Base that shall allow
mounting to a single-gang, double-gang, 4-inch square, 3.5-inch octal, 4-inch octal or 100mm European type back boxes. Two wire
appliance wiring shall be capable of directly connecting to the mounting base. Continuity checking of the entire NAC circuit prior to
attaching any notification appliances shall be allowed. Product shall come with Contact Cover to protect contact springs. Removal of
an appliance shall result in a supervision fault condition by the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). The mounting base shall be the same
base among all horn, strobe, horn strobe, wall and ceiling models. All notification appliances shall be backwards compatible.
The Series HS and ST wall models shall have a low profile measuring 5.24” H x 4.58” W x 2.19” D. Series HN wall shall measure 5.24”
H x 4.58” W x 1.6” D. The Series HSC and STC shall been round and have a low profile with a diameter of 6.68” x 2.63” D. Series
HNC ceiling shall have a diameter of 6.68” x 1.50” D.
When synchronization is required, the appliance shall be compatible with Wheelock®’s DSM Sync Modules, Wheelock® Power Supplies
or other manufacturer’s panels with built-in Wheelock® Patented Sync Protocol. The strobes shall not drift out of synchronization at any
time during operation. If the sync protocol fails to operate, the strobe shall revert to a non-synchronized flash-rate and still maintain (1)
flash per second over its Regulated Voltage Range. The appliance shall also be designed so that the audible signal may be silenced
while maintaining strobe activation when used with Wheelock® synchronization protocol.
Wall Appliances – UL Standard 1971, UL Standard 464, California State Fire Marshal (CSFM), ULC, FM
Ceiling Appliances – UL Standard 1971, UL Standard 464, California State Fire Marshal (CSFM), ULC, FM
WE ENCOURAGE AND SUPPORT NICET CERTIFICATION
3 YEAR WARRANTY
Exceder - Spec Sheet 6/11
NJ Location
273 Branchport Ave.
Long Branch, NJ 07740
P: 800-631-2148
F: 732-222-8707
www.coopernotification.com
Cooper Notification is
Notification
CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION
OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL
FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM
LISTING SERVICE
LISTING No.
7125-0785:0168
Page 1 of 1
CATEGORY:
7125 -- FIRE ALARM DEVICES FOR THE HEARING IMPAIRED
LISTEE:
Cooper Wheelock Inc.7246 16th St. E., Ste. 105, Sarasota, FL 34243
Contact: Tom Conover (941) 487-2336
Email: thomas.conover@cooperindustries.com
DESIGN:
Exceder Series: Models ST strobe, HS horn strobe and HN horn. Model ST is a synchronous
and non-synchronous strobe light. Model HS a visual/audible appliance and Model HN is an
audible signal appliance. All units followed by R (red) or W (white). Additionally, a ‘C’ may be
added for ceiling models and/or a ‘-NR’ may be added for non-resettable models. For non
-NR models and optional ‘S’ for silver fascia may be added*. Refer to listee's data sheet for
additional detailed product description and operational considerations.
RATING:
Electrical: 12 VDC/24VDC/FWR
Candela (wall)*: 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, 135 & 185
Candela (ceiling)*: 15, 30, 60, 75, 95, 115, 150, & 177
INSTALLATION:
In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances
and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. All models are for indoor use
and for wall mount only or ceiling mount only*
MARKING:
Listee's name, model number, electrical/candela rating, and UL label.
APPROVAL:
Listed as horn for fire alarm signaling and strobe, horn /strobe for the hearing impaired when
used with separately listed electrically compatible fire alarm control units. Refer to listee ’s
Installation Instructions Manual for details.
*Rev. 9-24-09 fm
This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed
the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not
an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct
operational requirements or installation criteria.
Refer to listee’s data sheet, installation instructions and/or other
Date Issued:
July 01, 2015
Authorized By:
JAMES PARSEGIAN, Program Coordinator
Fire Engineering Division
Listing Expires
June 30, 2016
8. FIRE ALARM111-124_Layout 1 5/13/15 9:30 AM Page 2
BULK CABLES: Fire Alarm Unshielded FPLR
Fire Alarm Cables
Power-Limited Multiple Conductor/
Unshielded
Applications:
Description:
• ASTM bare copper • Polypropylene insulation • Twisted pair or cabled
construction • Overall PVC jacket
Indoor for:
• Fire Alarm Circuits
• Initiating Devices
• Notification Devices
• Division 28 05 13.23
Rating:
• NEC Type FPLR
• (UL) Listed
• Meets 300V requirements as specified in the NEC
• Flame Rating: UL1666
Standard spool size 1000ft.
Catalog
No.
No. of
Cond.
Conductor
Type & Nom.
D.C.R
Insulation Type
& Thickness
Shielding
Inches
Jacket Type &
Thickness
Nom.
O.D.
Inches
Inches
NEC
Type
Nom.
Capacitance
Jacket
Color
18 AWG
Solid
6.5 Ω/Mft
PP*
.008
None
PVC
.017
.146
FPL R
19 pf/ft*
18 AWG
Solid
6.5 Ω/Mft
PP*
.008
None
PVC
.017
.170
FPL R
19 pf/ft*
1
Pair
16 AWG
Solid
4.1 Ω/Mft
PP*
.008
None
PVC
.017
.168
FPL R
20 pf/ft*
992
4
16 AWG
Solid
4.1 Ω/Mft
PP*
.008
None
PVC
.017
.198
FPL R
20 pf/ft*
994
1
Pair
14 AWG
Solid
2.6 Ω/Mft
PP*
.012
None
PVC
.017
.210
FPL R
22 pf/ft*
700
4
14 AWG
Solid
2.6 Ω/Mft
PP*
.012
None
PVC
.017
.246
FPL R
22 pf/ft*
Red
998
1
Pair
12 AWG
Solid
1.8 Ω/Mft
PP*
.012
None
PVC
.017
.244
FPL R
22 pf/ft*
Red
980
1
Pair
982
4
990
Color Code
1.Black, 2. Red, 3. Brown, 4. Blue
All
Cables
JACKET: Red
Select
Cables
INDICATOR CODE:
RD- Red, BL-Blue, OR-Orange, WH-White, YEYellow
112
RED
RED
RD, BL, WH
Red
RD, BL, YE
Special Notes:
• Selected Plenum Versions see pages 113
• Selected Indoor/Outdoor Aquaseal Water
Resistant® Versions see Aquaseal Section pg.115
• Select Items are Packaged in our Advantage Box
• Orange rip cord under jacket
• PP* - Polypropylene
• 500ft LENGTHS MAY BE AVAILABLE UPON
REQUEST. MINIMUM QUANTITIES APPLY.
• CUSTOM COLORED JACKETS MAY BE AVAILABLE.
MINMUM QUANTIES APPLY.
www.westpenn-wpw.com | 800-245-4964 | Specifications subject to change
CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION
OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL
FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM
LISTING SERVICE
LISTING No.
7161-0859:0101
Page 1 of 1
CATEGORY:
7161 -- CABLES-FIRE PROTECTIVE SIGNALING
LISTEE:
West Penn Wire2833 W Chestnut St, Washington, PA 15301
Contact: Mark Sams (724) 222-7060 Fax (724) 229-1151
Email: mark.sams@westpenn-cdt.com
DESIGN:
Types FPL and FPLP power limited fire protective signaling cable. Refer to listee's data
sheet for detailed product description and operational considerations.
INSTALLATION:
In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, NEC Article 760, applicable
codes and ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.
MARKING:
Listee's name, type, NEC rating and UL label.
APPROVAL:
Listed as power-limited fire protective signaling cable.
*Rev. 05-23-2005
This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed
the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not
an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct
operational requirements or installation criteria.
Refer to listee’s data sheet, installation instructions and/or other
Date Issued:
July 01, 2015
Authorized By:
JAMES PARSEGIAN, Program Coordinator
Fire Engineering Division
Listing Expires
June 30, 2016
SIMpull® CU THHN/THWN(-2)
600 Volts. Copper Conductor.
Thermoplastic Insulation/ Nylon Sheath.
Heat, Moisture, Gasoline, and Oil Resistant II.
All Sizes Rated Both THHN and either THWN (sizes 14, 12, and
10 AWG) or THWN-2 (sizes 8 AWG and larger).
Also Rated MTW and AWM (See Below).
SIMpull® Technology for Easier Pulling.
APPLICATIONS
Southwire SIMpull® CU THHN/THWN(-2) conductors are primarily used in conduit and cable trays for services, feeders, and
branch circuits in commercial or industrial applications as specified in the National Electrical Code. Voltage for all applications
is 600 volts. SIMpull® conductors are designed to be installed without application of a pulling lubricant.
These conductors have multiple ratings. Depending upon the product application, allowable temperatures are as follows:
THHN or T90 Nylon- Dry locations not to exceed 90° C
THWN-2- Wet or dry locations not to exceed 90° C or locations not to exceed 75° C when exposed to oil
THWN- Wet locations not to exceed 75° C or dry locations not to exceed 90° C or locations not to exceed 75° C when
exposed to oil
TWN75- Wet locations not to exceed 75° C
•
MTW- Wet locations or when exposed to oil at temperatures not to exceed 60° C or dry locations not to exceed 90° C
•
(with ampacity limited to that for 75° C conductor temperature per NFPA 79)
AWM- Dry locations not to exceed 105° C only when rated and used as appliance wiring material
•
•
•
•
SPECIFICATIONS
Southwire SIMpull® CU THHN/THWN(-2) conductors comply with:
· ASTM - B3, B8, and B787 (19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded)
· UL Standards 83, 758, 1063, and 1581
· CSA C22.2 No. 75, T90 Nylon/TWN75 Sizes through 1000 kcmil
· NOM-ANCE 90° C
· Federal Specification A-A-59544
· NEMA WC-70 (ICEA S-95-658) Construction Requirements
· National Electrical Code, NFPA 70
· CT Rated in Sizes 1/0 AWG and larger
· VW-1 - Sizes 14 through 1 AWG
· FT1 - All Sizes
· Sunlight Resistant – Sizes 2 AWG and larger
· AWM - Sizes 14 through 6 AWG
· MTW - Stranded Constructions Only
· RoHS/REACH Compliant
CONSTRUCTION
Southwire SIMpull® CU THHN/THWN(-2) conductors are made with soft drawn copper. Sizes 14 through 4/0 AWG use a
combination-unilay stranding while 250 kcmil and larger sizes use a compressed copper stranding. The wire is covered with a
tough heat and moisture resistant PVC insulation with an overall nylon jacket utilizing SIMpull® Technology. Available in black,
white, red, blue, purple, green, yellow, orange, brown, and gray. Also available in striped configurations. Some colors are
subject to economic order quantity.
Marked as THHN in all sizes. Also marked as THWN-2 in sizes 8 AWG and larger or marked as THWN in sizes 14, 12,
and 10 AWG. Marked sunlight resistant in sizes 2 AWG and larger.
Sizes 14, 12, and 10 AWG are available with SIMpull® Technology only in SIMpull® Barrel or CoilPAK® configurations.
12/14/2015
Page 1 of 2
SIMpull® CU THHN/THWN(-2)
Conductor
Size
Number
(AWG or of
kcmil)
Strands
Insulation Jacket
Nominal
Thickness Thickness O.D.
(mils)
(mils)
(mils)
Approx. Allowable Ampacities+
Weight
60° C
75° C
90° C
per 1000'
(lbs)
Standard
Package
14*
1
15
4
102
15
15
15
15
AC
12*
1
15
4
119
23
20
20
20
AC
10*
1
20
4
150
36
30
30
30
AC
14*
19
15
4
109
16
15
15
15
AC
12*
19
15
4
128
24
20
20
20
AC
10*
19
20
4
161
38
30
30
30
AC
8
19
30
5
213
63
40
50
55
ABCD
6
19
30
5
249
95
55
65
75
ABCD
4
19
40
6
318
152
70
85
100
ABCD
3
19
40
6
346
189
85
100
115
ABCD
2
19
40
6
378
234
95
115
130
ABCD
1
19
50
7
435
299
110
130
145
ABCD
1/0
19
50
7
474
372
125
150
170
ABCD
2/0
19
50
7
518
462
145
175
195
ABCD
3/0
19
50
7
568
575
165
200
225
ABCD
4/0
19
50
7
624
718
195
230
260
ABCD
250
37
60
8
694
851
215
255
290
ABCD
300
37
60
8
747
1012
240
285
320
ABC
350
37
60
8
797
1174
260
310
350
ABC
400
37
60
8
842
1334
280
335
380
ABC
500
37
60
8
926
1655
320
380
430
ABCD
600
61
70
9
1024
1987
350
420
475
ABC
750
61
70
9
1126
2464
400
475
535
BC
1000
61
70
9
1275
3257
455
545
615
C
* Sizes 14, 12, and 10 AWG are available with SIMpull® Technology only in SIMpull® Barrel or CoilPAK®
configurations.
+Allowable ampacities shown are for general use as specified by the 2014 Edition of the National Electrical
Code Sections 310.15 and 240.4(D). Unless the equipment is marked for use at higher temperatures the
conductor shall be limited to the following per NEC 110.14(C):
60° C - When terminated to equipment for circuits rated 100 amperes or less or marked for 14 - 1 AWG
conductors.
75° C - When terminated to equipment for circuits rated over 100 amperes or marked for conductors larger
than 1 AWG.
90° C - THHN dry locations and THWN-2 wet or dry locations for ampacity adjustment purposes using NEC
section 310.15.
12/14/2015
Standard Package:
A - 2500' Reel
B - 1000' Reel
C - 500' Spool
D - 5000' Reel
Page 2 of 2
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
Removing existing sapling trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants, grass, A.C. paving,
concrete curb, gutter and base material, existing concrete slabs.
2.
Clearing and grubbing, removal of existing brush and trees, unless shown to remain.
3.
Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place, [removing site
utilities.
4.
Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures.
B.
The contractor attention is directed to the requirements in Division 1 regarding the
preservation of existing trees. The work also includes the removal and disposal of obstacles
above and below ground that conflict with the work in this project whether or not such
obstructions are as shown on the plans.
C.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.2
Division 32 Section "Earthwork" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site
grading.
REFERENCED STANDARDS:
A.
The editions, specifications and standards referenced herein, published by the following
organizations apply to the construction only to the extent specified by the reference.
B.
Standard Specifications:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Standard Drawings:
1.
1.3
Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (current edition).
Standard Special Provisions of the Regional Standards Committee.
City of San Diego Standard Special Provisions, Document No. 769345 (current
edition).
California Department of Transportation, "Manual of Traffic Controls, for Construction
and maintenance Work Zones", (current edition), Document No. 869159.
City of San Diego Standard Drawings, Document No. 769374 (current edition).
DEFINITIONS
A.
Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and
clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than
underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more
than 2 inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials.
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 1
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
B.
1.4
gkkworks
Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected
during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of
groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated.
MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A.
1.5
Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain University’s property,
cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings,
adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage
caused by site clearing.
B.
Record drawings, according to Division 1 Section "Project Closeout," identifying and
accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and
mechanical conditions.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.7
Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements
in Division 1 Section “Quality Control.”
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
The plans show general information only. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to
examine the site to determine the exact existing conditions and character and extent of the
work to be performed and clearing operations required.
B.
Existing underground lines shown on the plans are shown from best possible information
available and shall be verified prior to start of any work. The Contractor is responsible for
locating all underground lines by potholing and/or locator service. The University maintains a
list of locator firms familiar with the underground conditions.
C.
Preserve in operating condition all active utilities transversing or within and about the site.
Promptly repair any damage to such utility or work due to work under this contract, to the
satisfaction of the University's Representative.
D.
Existing appurtenances and improvements, which are to remain, shall be protected from
damage due to work under this section. Such damaged facilities shall be promptly repaired
and/or replaced in kind.
E.
Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent
occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.
1.
2.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from University and authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by
authorities having jurisdiction.
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 2
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
F.
gkkworks
Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on
property adjoining University’s property will be obtained by University before award of
Contract.
1.
Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by University’s
Representative.
G.
Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on
University’s premises where indicated.
H.
Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control
measures are in place.
1.8
BARRICADES AND WORK AREA:
A.
Provide barricades and warnings (signs and lighting), and maintenance and supervision
thereof, in accordance with applicable Federal and State codes and their respective
requirements, or as may be directed from time to time by the University's Representative. Do
not commence site clearing until barricades and warnings are in place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOIL MATERIALS
A.
Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in
Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
1.
Obtain approved borrow soil materials off-site when satisfactory soil materials are not
available on-site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL:
A.
3.2
Clear and grub per Section 0300-1 standard specifications except as modified herein.
LIMITS:
A.
3.3
The limits of clearing, grubbing and demolition shall include all areas of work.
PREPARATION
A.
Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during
construction.
B.
Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 3
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
C.
Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1.
3.4
gkkworks
Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to
University.
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A.
Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,
according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during
construction until permanent vegetation has been established.
C.
Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during
removal.
3.5
UTILITIES
A.
Existing utility lines shall be removed as indicated on plans. Prior to their removal, all
required new re-routing and new connections shall be completed and made operative so that
their functions to other existing structures served by them can be continuous and
uninterrupted. Abandoned utility lines encountered during construction shall be removed.
B.
University will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing
structures before site clearing, when requested by Contractor.
1.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site
clearing.
C.
Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.
1.
University will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.
D.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by University or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
Notify University’s Representative not less than two days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without University’s Representative written
permission.
E.
Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.
F.
Removal of underground utilities is included in Division 2 Sections covering site utilities.
3.6
USE OF EXPLOSIVES:
A.
Use of explosives will not be permitted.
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 4
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
3.7
gkkworks
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A.
The limits of clearing and grubbing shall be the area of new construction
B.
Remove all trash, rubbish and all other material not suitable for construction operations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material
unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
1.
3.8
Remove trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new
construction.
Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be
relocated.
Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful
manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.
Grind stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18
inches below exposed subgrade.
Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone.
Chip removed tree branches and [stockpile in areas approved by [University’s
Representative] [dispose of off-site].
Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches , and
compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A.
Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B.
Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with
underlying subsoil or other waste materials.
1.
C.
Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil.
Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.9
Remove subsoil and non-soil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds,
roots, and other waste materials.
Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches.
Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones.
Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal.
Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.
SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A.
Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to
facilitate new construction.
B.
Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.
1.
Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length
of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces
vertically.
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 5
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
2.
3.10
A.
gkkworks
Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion.
DISPOSAL
All removed and demolished material, including but not limited to concrete, asphalt concrete,
trees, brush, vegetation and trash resulting from the work of this section is the property of the
Contractor and shall be promptly removed to a legal disposal area off campus. Asphalt and
concrete shall not be used as fill material unless otherwise noted.
1.
Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other non-recyclable
materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport
them to recycling facilities.
END OF SECTION 311000
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 6
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
SECTION 312000 – EARTHWORK
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
1.2
Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns and grasses.
Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
Subbase course for concrete concrete site work.
Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.
Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and
pits for buried utility structures.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for temporary erosion and sedimentation control
measures, site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of
above- and below-grade improvements and utilities.
REFERENCED STANDARDS:
A.
The editions, specifications and standards referenced herein, published by the following
organizations apply to the construction only to the extent specified by the reference.
B.
Standard Specifications:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (current edition).
Standard Special Provisions of the Regional Standards Committee.
City of San Diego Standard Special Provisions, Document No. 769345 (current
edition).
California Department of Transportation, "Manual of Traffic Controls, for Construction
and Maintenance Work Zones", (current edition), Document No. 869159.
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to the text by basis designation only.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:
C
33-86
Concrete Aggregates
C
136-84a
Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
D
4318-84
Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils
D
1140-54
Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the (R 1971)No. 200
(75 micrometer) Sieve
D
1556-82
Density of Soil Place by Sand Cone Method (R 1974)
D
1557-78
Moisture Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures
Using 10-lb (4.54 kg) Rammer and 18-in. (457mm) drop
D
2103-81
Polyethylene Film and Sheeting
D
2419-74
Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregates (R
1979)
D
2487-85 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes
D
2922-81 Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods
(Shallow Depth)
EARTHWORK
312000 - 1
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
D.
1.3
gkkworks
D
3017-78Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in place by Methods (Shallow
Depth)
DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
A.
1.4
Deliver and store materials in a manner to prevent contamination or segregation.
RECORDS OF INVESTIGATION:
A.
1.5
Refer to "Information Available to Bidders".
DEFINITIONS
A.
Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.
1.
2.
Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B.
Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.
C.
Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
D.
Pipe Zone:
The pipe zone shall include the full width of trench from the bottom of the pipe
or conduit to a horizontal level 12 inches above the top of the pipe. Where multiple pipes or
conduits are placed in the same trench, the pipe zone shall extend from the bottom of the
lowest pipes to a horizontal level above the top of the highest or topmost pipe. Thickness of
pipe zone above the highest top of pipe shall be as described above unless otherwise shown
on the Drawings or otherwise described in the specifications for the particular type of pipe
installed.
E.
Pipe Bedding: The pipe bedding shall be defined as a layer of material below the bottom of
the pipe or conduit as shown on the Drawings and extending over the full trench width in
which the pipe is bedded. Use a minimum thickness of 6 inches for the pipe bedding unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings or otherwise described in the specifications for the
particular type of pipe installed.
F.
Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
G.
Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical
and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or
below the ground surface.
H.
Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix
asphalt pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete
pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
I.
Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill
or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
EARTHWORK
312000 - 2
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
J.
1.6
gkkworks
Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:
1.
B.
1.7
Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and borrow soil material
proposed for fill and backfill.
Pre-excavation Photographs or Videotape:
Show existing conditions of adjoining
construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as
damage caused by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Pre-excavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements
in Division 1 Section "Quality Control."
B.
2013 California Building Code, Title 24, Part 2, Volume 2 of 2, Appendix J, Grading.
C.
ASTM D1557 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate
Mixtures Using 10-lb (4.54 kg) and 18-inch (457-mm) Drop.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by District or others
unless permitted in writing by District’s Representative and then only after arranging to
provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Notify District’s Representative not less than two days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without District’s Representative's written
permission.
Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.
Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be
removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOIL MATERIALS
A.
Materials for compact fill shall consist of any soil imported or excavated from the cut areas.
The soil shall contain no rocks or hard lumps greater than 3 inches in maximum dimension
and shall contain at least 30% of material smaller than 3/4 inch in size. Material of
EARTHWORK
312000 - 3
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
perishable, spongy, or otherwise improper nature shall not be used in fills. Asphalt concrete
pieces shall not be used in fill
Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GC, GW, GP, GM,
SC, SW, SP, and SM or a combination of these groups. Expansion Index (EI)
less than 30 as measured by ASTM D 4829.
Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH,
and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.
Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2
percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
B.
Native earth backfill used above the pipe zone shall be excavated, non-expansive,
fine-grained material free of roots, debris, and rocks larger than 3 inches.
C.
Materials placed within 36 inches of rough grade shall be select material as specified in Part
1 above. The material shall not swell more than 3% when compacted to 90% relative
compaction in accordance with ASTM D 1557 under an axial load of 160 psf.
D.
Representative samples of material to be used for fill shall be tested in the laboratory in the
order to determine the maximum density, optimum moisture content and classification of the
soil. To prevent the importation of contaminated materials to the site, prior to delivery, soil
materials obtained from off-site sources shall be sampled and tested in compliance with CA
EPA Department of Toxic Substances Control “Information Advisory, Clean Imported Fill
Material”, dated October 2001. Results will be submitted to the District for approval. Do not
import soils that exhibit a known risk to human health, the environment or both.
1.
Non-corrosive in accordance with the Caltrans (2012) corrosion guidelines and ACI
318 (2011). These include an electrical resistivity value greater than 1,000 ohmcentimeters, chloride content of less than 500 ppm, sulfate content of less than 1,000
ppm and pH greater than 5.5
E.
Fill material to be used under the building, slabs, pavement, and structures shall be on-site
or imported material, conforming to the above. Excavated on-site material will be considered
suitable for structural fill if it is free from organic matter and other deleterious substances and
conforms to the requirements specified above. No material shall be placed without the
approval of the District's Representative under the direction of the District's Geotechnical
Engineer.
F.
General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations.
G.
Base Course: Aggregates for base course shall conform to Section 26 of the Standard
Specifications, Class 2 for 3/4 inch maximum size gradation.
H.
Engineered Fill: Satisfactory Soil Materials / Borrow Fill Material, as described above,
placed in lifts no greater than 8 inches thick (loose measurements) and each lift moisture
conditioned. All engineered fill should be densified to a minimum relative compaction of 90
percent per ASTM D 1557.
EARTHWORK
312000 - 4
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
I.
Pipe Bedding: Sand material providing a sand equivalent of at least 30. All of the sand
bedding shall be compacted to 90 percent of maximum density as indicated in the Contract
Documents by mechanical means. Flooding and jetting shall not be permitted without prior
written approval from the Geotechnical Engineer. Where sheeting or shoring is used
densification of the bedding shall be accomplished after the sheeting or shoring has been
removed from the bedding zone, unless the sheeting or shoring is to be cut off or left in
place. Pipe bedding material shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding (8) eight
inches.
J.
Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand.
2.2
IMPORTED SAND - PIPE ZONE:
A.
Imported sand used in the pipe zone or for the pipe base shall have the following gradation:
1.
Sieve Size
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
2.3
3/8 inch
No. 4
No. 30
No. 100
No. 200
Percent Passing By Weight
100
75 - 100
12 - 50
5 - 20
0 - 10
ACCESSORIES
A.
Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide
and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core
encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when
tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Red: Electric.
Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
Orange: Telephone and other communications.
Blue: Water systems.
Green: Sewer systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused
by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by
earthwork operations.
B.
Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil,
debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in
Division 32 Section "Site Clearing."
EARTHWORK
312000 - 5
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
C.
3.2
gkkworks
Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 32
Section "Site Clearing," during earthwork operations.
EXPLOSIVES
A.
3.3
Explosives: Do not use explosives.
STAKING AND GRADES:
A.
Lay out work, establish necessary markers, bench marks, grading stakes, and other stakes
as required.
B.
Existing and finish elevations are shown on the drawings, and unless inconsistencies therein
are brought to the attention of the District's Representative in writing prior to commencement
of the construction, the Contractor will be held responsible for the proper location and
elevation of all work.
3.4
COMPACTED FILLS:
A.
Excavate the trench to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings with allowance for pipe
thickness and for pipe bedding. If the trench is excavated below the required grade, refill
any part of the trench excavated below the grade at no additional cost to the District with
crushed rock. Place the refilling material over the full width of trench in compacted layers
not exceeding 6 inches deep to the established grade.
B.
General: Unless otherwise specified, fill material shall be compacted while at a moisture
content near the optimum moisture content and to a density that is not less than the
maximum density determined in accordance with the ASTM D 1557 or other density
methods that will obtain equivalent results.
3.5
PREPARING AREAS TO BE FILLED:
A.
Objectionable material shall be removed from the surface upon which the fill is to be placed
and loose and porous soil shall be removed and compacted to the depths specified.
B.
After the foundation has been cleared, plowed or scarified, it shall be disced or bladed until it
is uniform and free from clods, brought to the proper moisture content and compacted as
specified for fill.
3.6
PLACING, SPREADING, AND COMPACTING FILL MATERIAL:
A.
The fill materials shall be placed in layers that when compacted shall not exceed 6". Each
layer shall be spread evenly and be thoroughly mixed during the spreading to obtain
uniformity of material in each layer.
EARTHWORK
312000 - 6
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
B.
When the moisture content of the fill material is above that specified, the fill material shall be
aerated by the Contractor by blading, mixing or other satisfactory methods until the moisture
content is as specified.
C.
When the moisture content of the fill material is below that specified, water shall be added by
the Contractor until the moisture content is as specified.
D.
After each layer has been placed, mixed and spread evenly, it shall be thoroughly
compacted to the specified density. Compaction shall be accomplished by sheepsfoot
rollers, vibratory roller, multiple-wheel pneumatic-tired rollers or other types of acceptable
compacting equipment. Equipment shall be of such design that it will be able to compact the
fill to the specified density. Compaction shall be continuous over the entire area and the
equipment shall make sufficient trips to insure that the desired density has been obtained
throughout the entire fill.
E.
After the subgrade has been compacted, the surface shall be reshaped to conform to the
drawings and high or low spots eliminated. The finished subgrade shall be thoroughly
compacted by rolling, vibrating and tamping to a uniform dense surface. The subgrade shall
be protected from displacement by equipment or other operations.
F.
Where fills are constructed on hillsides or slopes, topsoil, slopewash and colluvium shall be
removed. Where the exposed slope is steeper than 6 horizontal to 1 vertical, or where
specified, the slope on the original ground on which the fill is to be placed shall be stepped
or benched. The bottom bench shall be a minimum of 15 feet wide, at least 2 feet deep, and
expose firm material over the entire excavation. After excavation of existing ground or
removal of unacceptable material at the exposed subgrade, scarify the surface and compact
as described above. The District's Geotechnical Engineer will be afforded the opportunity to
determine the width and frequency of all succeeding benches.
G.
No asphalt concrete, Portland Cement Concrete or any other rubble shall be allowed in fill.
3.7
STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL:
A.
Over-Excavate areas beneath and five feet beyond building foundations to 3-ft below
existing grade. Recompact native materials if satisfactory, or provide satisfactory fill
materials per requirements of this specification.
B.
Structural excavation and backfill shall be done per Sections 300-3.1, 300-3.3, 300-3.4 and
300-3.5 of the Standard Specifications. Jetting shall not be permitted.
3.8
EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A.
Excavate for foundations, pits, trenches, footings, floor slabs, concrete walks to the lines and
levels required, shown on the drawings and specified herein, and provide shoring, bracing,
cribbing, pumping, and planking required. The bottoms of trenches shall be level, tamped
firm, clean and free from debris or foreign matter. Excavations shall be kept free from
standing water at all times.
B.
Excavated earth material which is suitable for structural fill or backfill, as determined by the
District's Representative, shall be conditioned for re-use and properly stockpiled for later
EARTHWORK
312000 - 7
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
filling and backfilling operations. Conditioning shall consist of spreading in layers not to
exceed 8 inches. Rocks and aggregate, exceeding 6" in the largest dimension, and
deleterious material shall be removed from the site off campus to a legal disposal site.
C.
3.9
Abandoned sewers, piping, and other utilities encountered in the progress of the excavation,
shall be removed off campus to a legal disposal site.
EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A.
3.10
A.
3.11
Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch.
If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and
removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for
inspections.
EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations,
and subgrades.
EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A.
Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
B.
Trench widths in the pipe zone shall be as shown on the Drawings. If no details are shown,
maximum width shall be 18 inches greater than the pipe outside diameter. Trench width at
the top of the trench will not be limited except where width of excavation would undercut
adjacent structures and footings. In such case, width of trench shall be such that there is at
least 18 inches between the top edge of the trench and the structure or footing.
C.
Excavate the trench to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings with allowance for pipe
thickness and for pipe bedding. If the trench is excavated below the required grade, refill
any part of the trench excavated below the grade at no additional cost to the District with
crushed rock. Place the refilling material over the full width of trench in compacted layers
not exceeding 6 inches deep to the established grade.
D.
Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe
or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top
of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and
support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells,
joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting
stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade.
1.
For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed,
multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and
conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.
EARTHWORK
312000 - 8
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
2.
3.
F.
A.
3.13
For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench
to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped
sand backfill.
Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding
bearing material to allow for bedding course.
Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow
for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe.
1.
3.12
gkkworks
Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding
bearing material to allow for bedding course.
LOCATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL:
During trench excavation, place the excavated material adjacent to the trench as directed by
the District's Representative. Do not obstruct any roadways or streets. Conform to federal
and state codes governing the safe loading of trenches with excavated material.
SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A.
Notify District’s Representative when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B.
If District’s Representative determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation
and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
C.
Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired
equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or
saturated subgrades.
1.
2.
D.
3.14
Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction
perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.
Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting,
as determined by District’s Representative, and replace with compacted backfill or fill
as directed.
Reconstruct subgrades damaged by rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as
directed by District’s Representative, without additional compensation.
UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A.
Over Excavation: If excavations for foundation work are made deeper than indicated, fill with
same concrete as specified for foundation work, without additional expense to District. If
excavations for foundation work are made wider than indicated, form footing work or fill with
same concrete as specified for foundation work at no additional expense to District.
B.
If excavations for slabs or flatwork are made deeper than indicated, fill with coarse, sand to
required levels. Compact at optimum moisture content to 90 percent density.
EARTHWORK
312000 - 9
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
C.
If excavations to greater depths than shown are required by the Geotechnical Engineer in
order to reach satisfactory soil bearing conditions, the District's Representative is to be
notified.
D.
Surplus materials may not be disposed of on site and must be disposed of off campus in a
legal disposal area per Section 300-2.6 of the Standard Specifications. Surplus soil may not
be exported to a K-12 school site or to a residential site.
3.15
A.
STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.
Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1.
3.16
A.
BACKFILL
Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
3.17
Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line
of remaining trees.
Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage,
dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.
Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.
Testing and inspecting underground utilities.
Removing concrete formwork.
Removing trash and debris.
Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
Place backfill on subgrades free of mud.
UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A.
Place backfill on subgrades free of mud.
B.
Backfill per the detailed piping specification for the particular type of pipe and per the
following.
C.
Place the specified thickness of pipe bedding material over the full width of trench. Grade
the top of the pipe bedding ahead of the pipelaying to provide firm, uniform support along the
full length of pipe.
D.
Excavate bell holes at each joint to permit proper assembly and inspection of the entire joint.
E.
After pipe has been bedded, place pipe zone material simultaneously on both sides of the
pipe (maximum lift thickness 6") keeping the level of backfill the same on each side.
Carefully place the material around the pipe so that the pipe barrel is completely supported
and that no voids or uncompacted areas are left beneath the pipe. Use particular care in
placing material on the underside of the pipe to prevent lateral movement during backfilling.
EARTHWORK
312000 - 10
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
F.
Compact material placing within 12 inches of the outer surface of the pipe by hand tamping
only.
G.
Push the backfill material carefully into the backfill previously placed in the pipe zone
(maximum lift thickness 6"). Do not permit free fall of the material until at least 2 feet of
cover is provided over the top of the pipe. Do not drop sharp, heavy pieces of material
directly onto the pipe or the tamped material around the pipe.
H.
Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding
course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints,
fittings, and bodies of conduits.
I.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or otherwise described in the specifications for the
particular type of pipe installed, relative compaction in pipe trenches shall be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pipe zone: 90% relative compaction.
Backfill above pipe zone not beneath paving: 90% relative compaction.
Backfill above pipe zone in repaved areas: 95% relative compaction for top 24
inches; 90% relative compaction for backfill below 24 inches.
Backfill above pipe zone in new pavement areas: 95% relative compaction for top 12
inches; 90% relative compaction for backfill below 12 inches.
J.
Compact trench backfill to the specified relative compaction. Compact by using mechanical
compaction or hand tamping. Do not use high impact hammer-type equipment except where
the pipe manufacturer warrants in writing that such use will not damage the pipe.
K.
Do not use any axle-driven or tractor-drawn compaction equipment within 5 feet of walls and
structures.
L.
Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches
below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.18
SOIL FILL
A.
Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill
material will bond with existing material.
B.
Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.
Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud.
EARTHWORK
312000 - 11
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
3.19
A.
3.20
gkkworks
MATERIAL REPLACEMENT:
Remove and replace any trenching and backfilling material which does not meet the
specifications, at the Contractor's expense.
FINISH GRADING:
A.
General: Fine grade to bring areas to required lines and grades. The subgrade elevation
within the building area for slabs on grade shall be within 1/2" along a 10"-0" straight edge.
B.
Slope finish grades to drain surface water away from buildings, walks. Generally, grade with
uniform slope between points where elevations are given, or between such points and
existing grades.
1.
2.
C.
Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding.
Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
D.
3.21
Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface
tolerances.
Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch.
Walks: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a
10-foot straightedge.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: District will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering
testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.
B.
Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. The
Contractor shall conduct his operations to permit tests to be made without interference from
his forces and equipment. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for
previously completed work comply with requirements.
C.
When tests indicate that the density of any layer of fill or portion thereof is below the
specified density, such layer or portion shall be re-worked and re-tested until the specified
density has been obtained. Re-testing shall be paid for by the Contractor.
D.
No more than two feet of fill in vertical elevation shall be placed without at least one field
density test being made within that interval.
E.
Samples: Submit at least one 50-pound composite sample for each 500 cubic yards of
embankment material being placed. Samples, in the number directed, shall also be
submitted whenever the source or character of the embankment material changes. Each
sample shall be taken in three increments from the same truck one increment from the first
EARTHWORK
312000 - 12
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
third of the load, one when half of the load has been dumped, and one from the final third of
the load during dumping of the material.
F.
Each sample shall be contained in a clean container which shall be fastened to prevent loss
of material. Each sample shall be tagged for identification. The tag shall contain the
following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Project No.
Sample No.
Date of Sample
Sampler
Source
Intended Use
G.
Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be
performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other
footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade
when approved by District’s Representative.
H.
Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D
2099/D 3017, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be
performed at the following locations and frequencies:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
I.
3.22
Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill
layer, at least 1 test for every 2000 sq. ft. less of paved area or building slab, but in no
case fewer than 3 tests.
Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each
100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests.
Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for
each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests.
In paved areas, one density test will be taken for each 2,000 square feet of subgrade
in cut.
The District reserves the right to take more tests as required.
When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth
required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
PROTECTION
A.
During construction, properly graded excavated surfaces to provide positive drainage and
prevent ponding of water. Control surface water to avoid damage to adjoining properties, or
to finished work on the site. Take remedial measures to prevent erosion of freshly graded
areas and slopes, until such time as permanent drainage and erosion control measures have
been installed.
B.
After completion of grading and the District's Representative has finished observations of the
work, no further excavation or filling shall be done except under the observation of the
District's Representative.
EARTHWORK
312000 - 13
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
C.
Erosion prevention shall continue through the duration of the project. Any debris or
washouts deposited at bottom of slope of graded areas shall be replaced immediately and
reworked to proper compaction requirements.
D.
Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of
trash and debris.
E.
Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially
completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to
subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.
1.
F.
Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1.
2.
3.23
A.
3.24
Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by District’s
Representative; reshape and recompact.
Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent
work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
Protect open excavations, trenches, and the like with fences, covers, and railings as
required to maintain safe pedestrian and vehicular traffic passage. Prevent erosion of
freshly graded areas during construction and until such time as permanent drainage
and erosion control measures have been installed.
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil,
trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off District's property.
EXISTING UTILITIES:
A.
Existing utilities are shown from available records and the accuracy of their location cannot
be guaranteed. The Contractor shall pothole as necessary to locate horizontally and
vertically all existing utilities. Any discrepancy from the plans shall be reported to the
District's Representative immediately. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs due
to discrepancies in the location of existing utilities if the Contractor fails to pothole and locate
existing utilities and notify the District's Representative of discrepancies prior to start of
construction.
B.
Abandoned utilities encountered during all construction operations shall be removed as
required to complete all work shown on plans.
C.
Live utilities shall remain in service at all times unless otherwise noted.
3.25
A.
COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS:
Cleanup: Leave entire graded portions of the site "rake-clean".
EARTHWORK
312000 - 14
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
B.
gkkworks
Disposal: Pick up and transport unsuitable, deleterious, excess material, and debris to an
off-site legal disposal area.
END OF SECTION 312000
EARTHWORK
312000 - 15
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
Hot-mix asphalt paving.
Division 32 Section "Earthwork" for aggregate subbase and base courses and for
aggregate pavement shoulders.
Division 32 Section "Pavement Joint Sealants" for joint sealants and fillers at
paving terminations.
REFERENCED STANDARDS
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
1.
State of California, Department of Transportation:
a.
2.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:
a.
1.3
Current Edition; Standard Specifications.
D 2172-81 - Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen from Bituminous Paving
Mixtures.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms.
B.
DOT: Department of Transportation.
1.4
A.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide hot-mix asphalt paving according to materials, workmanship, and other
applicable requirements of standard specifications of State of California, Department of
Transportation.
ASPHALT PAVING
321216-1
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
1.5
gkkworks
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested
physical and performance properties.
B.
Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each
job mix proposed for the Work.
1.
2.
3.
Prepare mix design; sample and test materials and equipment for compliance
with the specifications. Properly mark samples to show the name of the material,
name of the supplier, contract number and the segment of the work where the
material represented by the sample is to be used.
Submit copies of
weighmaster's certificates or certified delivery tickets for each truck load of
material.
Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificate of compliance for the bituminous
and paint materials.
Job-Mix Formula: Submit a job mix for each type of bituminous mixture prior to
starting work. The formula shall be within the specified design range.
C.
Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work.
D.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
E.
Material Test Reports: For each paving material.
F.
Material Certificates: For each paving material, signed by manufacturers.
1.6
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer.
1.
Manufacturer shall be a paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved
by authorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of the state in which Project is
located.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing
indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
A.
Regulatory Requirements:
Comply with State of California, Department of
Transportation for asphalt paving work.
B.
Asphalt-Paving Publication: Comply with AI MS-22, "Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt
Pavements," unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings” and Quality Control."
ASPHALT PAVING
321216-2
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
D.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings” and Quality Control." Review
methods and procedures related to hot-mix asphalt paving including, but not limited to,
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.7
gkkworks
Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location
of plant that will manufacture hot-mix asphalt.
Review condition of subgrade and preparatory work.
Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic
during installation period and for remainder of construction period.
Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and
avoid delays.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals
unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of
material, date of manufacture, and directions for storage.
B.
Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location within
temperature range required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct
sunlight.
1.8
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or
excessively damp or if the following conditions are not met:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Prime and Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F.
Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations of ASTM D 3910.
Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at
time of placement.
Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of
placement.
Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces
and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil-based materials,
50 deg F for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F.
ASPHALT PAVING
321216-3
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
AGGREGATES
General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous
installations.
1.
The grading and proportioning of aggregates shall be such that the combined
mineral aggregate conforms to the specified requirements.
B.
Aggregate for asphaltic concrete shall conform to Section 39 of the Standard
Specifications, Class B for individual test result conforming to 1/2 inch maximum size
gradation, medium.
C.
Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or
properly cured, crushed blast-furnace slag.
D.
Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 1073, sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from
stone, gravel, properly cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof.
1.
E.
2.2
For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of
the total aggregate mass.
Mineral Filler:
material.
ASTM D 242, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert
ASPHALT MATERIALS
A.
Asphalt Binder: AASHTO MP 1, PG 64-22.
B.
Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381 for viscosity-graded material.
1.
Asphalt Cement: Section 92 of the Standard Specifications, Grade AR-8000 for
parking lots and AR-4000 for streets.
C.
Prime Coat: ASTM D 2027, medium-curing cutback asphalt, MC-30 or MC-70.
D.
Prime Coat: Asphalt emulsion prime complying with State of California, DOT
requirements.
E.
Tack Coat: ASTM D 977, emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397, cationic emulsified
asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.
F.
Fog Seal: ASTM D 977, emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397, cationic emulsified
asphalt, slow setting, factory diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for
application.
G.
Water: Potable.
ASPHALT PAVING
321216-4
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
H.
2.3
gkkworks
Undersealing Asphalt: ASTM D 3141, pumping consistency.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA. Provide in
granular, liquid, or wettable powder form.
B.
Sand: ASTM D 1073, Grade Nos. 2 or 3.
C.
Paving Geotextile: AASHTO M 288, nonwoven polypropylene; resistant to chemical
attack, rot, and mildew; and specifically designed for paving applications.
D.
Joint Sealant:
ASTM D 3405, hot-applied, single-component, polymer-modified
bituminous sealant.
2.4
A.
MIXES
Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities
having jurisdiction; designed according to procedures in AI MS-2, "Mix Design Methods
for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types"; and complying with the following
requirements:
1.
The bituminous concrete shall consist of mineral aggregate, uniformly mixed with
bituminous material in a central plant in accordance with Section 39 of the
Standard Specifications. The percentage of asphalt cement binder shall be in
accordance with Section 39 of the Standard Specifications. The mixing plant and
construction equipment shall conform to the requirements of Section 39 of the
Standard Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed
loads.
B.
Proof-roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are
unstable or that require further compaction.
C.
Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
ASPHALT PAVING
321216-5
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
3.2
A.
COLD MILLING
Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before
cold milling. Remove existing asphalt pavement by cold milling to grades and cross
sections indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.3
gkkworks
Mill to a depth of 2 inches.
Mill to a uniform finished surface free of gouges, grooves, and ridges.
Control rate of milling to prevent tearing of existing asphalt course.
Repair or replace curbs, manholes, and other construction damaged during cold
milling.
Excavate and trim unbound-aggregate base course, if encountered, and keep
material separate from milled hot-mix asphalt.
Transport milled hot-mix asphalt to asphalt recycling facility.
Keep milled pavement surface free of loose material and dust.
PATCHING
A.
Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing
pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches,
extending 12 inches into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut
excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing
unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.
B.
Portland Cement Concrete Pavement: Break cracked slabs and roll as required to
reseat concrete pieces firmly.
1.
2.
C.
Pump hot undersealing asphalt under rocking slabs until slab is stabilized or, if
necessary, crack slab into pieces and roll to reseat pieces firmly.
Remove disintegrated or badly cracked pavement. Excavate rectangular or
trapezoidal patches, extending into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise
indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Recompact existing unboundaggregate base course to form new subgrade.
Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix
asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd..
1.
2.
Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.
Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.
Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.
D.
Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot,
compact flush with adjacent surface.
E.
Patching: Partially fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while
still hot, compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer
finished flush with adjacent surfaces.
ASPHALT PAVING
321216-6
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
3.4
A.
REPAIRS
Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of hot-mix asphalt
surface course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch in existing
pavements.
1.
B.
3.
A.
General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious
material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive
paving.
Mix herbicide with prime coat if formulated by manufacturer for that purpose.
Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound-aggregate base
course at a rate of 0.15 to 0.50 gal./sq. yd.. Apply enough material to penetrate and
seal but not flood surface. Allow prime coat to cure for 72 hours minimum.
1.
2.
D.
Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course.
Do not dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base
course.
Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates
and written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of
compacted-aggregate base before applying paving materials.
1.
C.
Clean cracks and joints in existing hot-mix asphalt pavement.
Use emulsified-asphalt slurry to seal cracks and joints less than 1/4 inch wide.
Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess.
Use hot-applied joint sealant to seal cracks and joints more than 1/4 inch wide.
Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess.
SURFACE PREPARATION
1.
B.
Install leveling wedges in compacted lifts not exceeding 3 inches thick.
Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing joint filler material from cracks or joints to a
depth of 1/4 inch.
1.
2.
3.5
gkkworks
If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread
sand over surface to blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup
under traffic. Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and
after volatiles have evaporated.
Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.
Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15
gal./sq. yd..
1.
Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.
ASPHALT PAVING
321216-7
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
2.
3.6
gkkworks
Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.
Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING
A.
Deliver bituminous mixtures to the roadbed at temperatures specified in Section 39 of
the Standard Specifications. Spread in accordance with Section 39 of the Standard
Specifications. Cover all loads with tarpaulin or other material during transportation.
B.
Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off.
Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that
prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and
thickness when compacted.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of
a lesser width are required.
1.
D.
3.7
A.
Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated.
Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift.
Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F.
Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high
side of one-way slopes, unless otherwise indicated.
Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls
and tears in asphalt-paving mat.
After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend
rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt base course
before placing asphalt surface course.
Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable
hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix
asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.
JOINTS
Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections.
Construct joints free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other
sections of hot-mix asphalt course.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints.
Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches.
Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches.
Construct transverse joints as described in AI MS-22, "Construction of Hot Mix
Asphalt Pavements."
Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without
excessive displacement.
ASPHALT PAVING
321216-8
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
6.
3.8
A.
gkkworks
Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course
density.
COMPACTION
General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight
without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or
vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.
1.
2.
Initial or breakdown rolling and the final rolling of the uppermost layer of the
asphalt concrete shall be in accordance with Section 39 of the Standard
Specifications. Compaction by vehicular traffic shall not be permitted.
Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F.
B.
Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling
joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for
indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to
comply with requirements.
C.
Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling
while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling
until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:
1.
2.
Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according to
AASHTO T 245, but not less than 94 percent nor greater than 100 percent.
Average Density:
92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density
according to ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96
percent.
D.
Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt
is still warm.
E.
Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of
pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact
thoroughly.
F.
Joining Pavement: Carefully make joints between old and new pavements or between
successive day's work made in such manner as to insure a continuous bond between
old and new sections of the course. Expose and clean edges of existing pavement.
Cut edge to straight, vertical surfaces. Paint all joints with a uniform coat of tack coat
before the fresh mixture is placed. Prepare joints in the new pavement in accordance
with Section 39 of the Standard Specifications.
G.
Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign
materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified
density and surface smoothness.
ASPHALT PAVING
321216-9
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
H.
Protection of Pavement: After final rolling, no vehicular traffic of any kind shall be
permitted on the pavement until it has cooled and hardened and in no case less than 6
hours.
I.
Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to
become marked.
3.9
A.
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the
following tolerances:
1.
2.
B.
Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within
the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied
transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:
1.
2.
3.
3.10
A.
3.11
A.
Base Course: 1/4 inch.
Surface Course: 1/8 inch.
Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to
crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch.
ASPHALT CURBS
Construct hot-mix asphalt curbs over compacted pavement surfaces. Apply a light tack
coat unless pavement surface is still tacky and free from dust. Spread mix at minimum
temperature of 250 deg F.
1.
B.
Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
Asphalt Mix: Same as pavement surface-course mix.
Place hot-mix asphalt to curb cross section indicated or, if not indicated, to local
standard shapes, by machine or by hand in wood or metal forms. Tamp hand-placed
materials and screed to smooth finish. Remove forms after hot-mix asphalt has
cooled.
SURFACE TREATMENTS
Seal Coat: Seal coat shall be furnished and applied in accordance with the provisions
in Section 37 of the Standard Specifications of the State of California, Department of
Transportation, and shall be applied at a rate of 0.05 to 0.1 gallons of asphaltic
emulsion per square yard of paving followed by a uniform layer of plaster sand over the
entire paved surface. Ten days following seal coating, all excess and loose sand shall
be swept and cleaned from the site. Care shall be exercising to avoid splattering
asphalt on concrete structures, piping, etc. All structures, equipment and piping that
ASPHALT PAVING
321216-10
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
are adjacent to surfaces being sealed shall be wrapped with 15-pound building felt to a
height of 4 feet prior to applying liquid asphalt.
B.
Slurry Seals: Apply slurry coat in a uniform thickness according to ASTM D 3910 and
allow to cure.
1.
3.12
A.
3.13
A.
Roll slurry seal to remove ridges and provide a uniform, smooth surface.
INSPECTION OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
The District's Representative shall have access at all times to all parts of the batch
plant for checking the adequacy of the equipment in use, inspecting the operation of
the plant, verifying weight, proportions and character of materials and checking
temperatures being maintained in the preparation of the mixture.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Testing Agency: District will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting
agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
1.
2.
3.
4.
The in-place density of compacted base course will be determined. No payment
will be made for the areas of pavement deficient in composition, density or
thickness until they are removed and replaced. Determine maximum density in
accordance with ASTM D 1557, Method D. Perform in place density tests in
accordance with ASTM D 1556.
The asphalt content in percent by extraction in accordance with ASTM D 2172,
Method A will be determined.
The field density of compacted asphalt concrete shall be determined by a
properly calibrated nuclear asphalt testing device.
Compaction tests to be at a rate determined by the District for each lift or course
of asphalt concrete placed.
B.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to
determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
C.
Thickness:
In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be
determined according to ASTM D 3549.
D.
Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested
for compliance with smoothness tolerances.
E.
In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures
and compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979.
1.
Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results
from four samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site,
ASPHALT PAVING
321216-11
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
2.
prepared according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix
specifications.
In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core
samples according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.
a.
b.
F.
3.14
A.
gkkworks
One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. or less of installed
pavement, with no fewer than 3 cores taken.
Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by
nuclear method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with
ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.
Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or
measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.
DISPOSAL
Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project
site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1.
Do not allow excavated materials to accumulate on-site.
END OF SECTION 321216
ASPHALT PAVING
321216-12
SAN MARCOS UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
MISSION HILLS HIGH SCHOOL – CONCESSIONS/RESTROOM BLDG
gkkworks
SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
Parking lots.
Curbs and gutters.
Walkways.
Division 32 Section "Earthwork" for subgrade preparation, grading, and subbase
course.
Division 32 Section "Pavement Joint Sealants" for joint sealants of joints in
concrete pavement and at isolation joints of concrete pavement with adjacent
construction.
REFERENCED STANDARDS
The editions and specifications and standards referenced herein, published by the
following organizations apply to the construction only to the extent specified by the
reference.
1.
Standard Specifications:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
1.3
A.
Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (current edition).
Standard special provisions of the Regional Standards Committee.
City of San Diego Standard Special Provisions, Document No. 769709
(current date).
California Department of Transportation, "Manual of Traffic Controls, for
Construction and Maintenance Work Zones," (current edition), Document
No. 869159 (current date).
Standard Drawings: City of San Diego Standard Drawings, Document No.
769710 (current date).
DEFINITIONS
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of
blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blastfurnace slag.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
312313-1
SAN MARCOS UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
MISSION HILLS HIGH SCHOOL – CONCESSIONS/RESTROOM BLDG
1.4
gkkworks
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions
for proprietary materials and items such as admixtures, curing materials, and joint
systems.
B.
Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture. Include alternate mixture
designs when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or
other circumstances warrant adjustments.
C.
Quality Control: Tests of concrete shall be made by a Testing Laboratory approved by
the District's Representative. The cost of sampling and testing required by these
specifications shall be borne by the District, except that any retesting of nonconforming
material shall be paid for by the Contractor. Concrete shall have a compressive
strength of 2,500 psi at the end of 28 days unless otherwise noted.
D.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on
comprehensive testing of current materials:
E.
Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following
materials complies with requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
1.5
A.
Field quality-control test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products who
complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1.
B.
Cementitious materials.
Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.
Admixtures.
Curing compounds.
Applied finish materials.
Joint fillers.
Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed
Concrete Production Facilities."
Testing Agency Qualifications:
An independent agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E 548.
1.
Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification
program.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
312313-2
SAN MARCOS UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
MISSION HILLS HIGH SCHOOL – CONCESSIONS/RESTROOM BLDG
gkkworks
C.
ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless
modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.
D.
Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform
material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
1.6
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for
other construction activities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
FORMS
Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type
materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.
1.
B.
2.2
Use flexible or curved forms for curves with a radius 100 feet or less.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond
with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent
treatments of concrete surfaces.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed.
B.
Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M or ASTM A 934/A 934M; with
ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed bars.
C.
Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to
length with ends square and free of burrs.
D.
Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars:
Grade 60, plain steel bars.
E.
Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
2.3
A.
ASTM A 775/A 775M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M,
CONCRETE MATERIALS
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type,
brand, and source throughout the Project:
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
312313-3
SAN MARCOS UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
MISSION HILLS HIGH SCHOOL – CONCESSIONS/RESTROOM BLDG
1.
2.
3.
4.
gkkworks
Concrete for flatwork shall be 520-C-2500 per Section 201-1 of the Standard
Specifications.
Concrete for curbs and gutters shall be Class 520-C-2500 per Section 201-1 of
the Standard Specifications.
Concrete for cross gutters shall be Class 560-C-3250 per Section 201-1 of the
Standard Specification.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II
a.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.
B.
Combined Aggregate: 1" maximum coarse aggregate size conforming to Grading C of
Standard Specifications Section 201-1.3.2(A). Aggregates shall be obtained from pits
acceptable to the INSPECTOR, shall be non-reactive, and shall conform to ASTM C
33.
C.
Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.
D.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
E.
Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible
with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride
ions by mass of cementitious material.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.4
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,
Type G.
Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
CURING MATERIALS
A.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,
weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry.
B.
Moisture-Retaining Cover:
polyethylene sheet.
C.
Water: Potable.
D.
Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound:
Class B.
1.
ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-
ASTM C 309, Type 1,
Products:
a.
Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
312313-4
SAN MARCOS UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
MISSION HILLS HIGH SCHOOL – CONCESSIONS/RESTROOM BLDG
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
2.5
A.
Burke by Edoko; Aqua Resin Cure.
ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear.
Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; W.B. Resin Cure.
Dayton Superior Corporation; Day Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W).
Euclid Chemical Company (The); Kurez DR VOX.
Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420.
Lambert Corporation; Aqua Kure-Clear.
L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100 Clear.
Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Resin Cure E.
Symons Corporation; Resi-Chem Clear.
Tamms Industries Inc.; Horncure WB 30.
Unitex; Hydro Cure 309.
Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100.
RELATED MATERIALS
Expansion-and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic
fiber.
1.
B.
gkkworks
Use a preformed asphalt-impregnated expansion joint filler 1/4 inch thick for
curbs and sidewalks conforming to Section 201-3.2 of the Standard
Specifications.
Expansion Joint Sealer:
1.
Expansion joint sealer shall be a two part polysulfide sealant conforming to
Federal Specification TT-S-00227, Class A, self-leveling, colored to match the
concrete.
C.
Finish Coat:
1.
Finish coat shall consist of Class B mortar per subsection 201.5.1 of the
Standard Specifications.
D.
Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
E.
Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of
humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application
temperature and of grade to requirements, and as follows:
1.
Type V for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
312313-5
SAN MARCOS UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
MISSION HILLS HIGH SCHOOL – CONCESSIONS/RESTROOM BLDG
2.6
A.
CONCRETE MIXTURES
Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and
strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field
experience.
1.
B.
gkkworks
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed
concrete mixture designs for the trial batch method.
Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:
1.
2.
Compressive Strength (28 Days): 2500.
Slump Limit: 4 inches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements
for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.
B.
Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after nonconforming conditions have
been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement.
3.2
A.
3.3
PREPARATION
Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing
concrete.
EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for
pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous
progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete
placement.
B.
Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from
concrete without damage.
3.4
A.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing,
and supporting reinforcement.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
312313-6
SAN MARCOS UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
MISSION HILLS HIGH SCHOOL – CONCESSIONS/RESTROOM BLDG
gkkworks
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing
materials.
C.
Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in
position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.
D.
Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining
pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths
to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
E.
Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxycoated reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair
coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M.
F.
Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them
flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace
units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap of adjacent
mats.
3.5
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel
reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit
installation of their work.
B.
Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed.
Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required
finish elevation and alignment.
C.
Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing
concrete.
D.
Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.
E.
Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do
not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
F.
Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment
supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.
1.
G.
Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with
an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or
side forms.
Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and
consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement,
dowels, and joint devices.
Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
312313-7
SAN MARCOS UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
MISSION HILLS HIGH SCHOOL – CONCESSIONS/RESTROOM BLDG
gkkworks
H.
Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and
uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface.
Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or
spreading surface treatments.
I.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete
work from physical damage.
1.
2.
J.
Hot-Weather Placement:
conditions exist:
1.
2.
3.
3.6
When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F,
uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture
temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of
placement.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents
or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mix
designs.
Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather
Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F
at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to
control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount
of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not
exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete.
Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
FLOAT FINISHING
A.
General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.
B.
Float Finish:
1.
Surfaces Sloped Less than 6%: Provide a medium salt (medium broom) finish by
drawing a soft bristle broom across concrete surface, perpendicular to line of
traffic, to provide a uniform fine line texture.
2.
Surfaces Sloped greater than 6%: Provide a slip resistant (heavy broom finish)
by striating surface 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom,
perpendicular to line of traffic.
3.7
CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or
hot temperatures.
B.
Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
312313-8
SAN MARCOS UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
MISSION HILLS HIGH SCHOOL – CONCESSIONS/RESTROOM BLDG
gkkworks
C.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during
finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after
placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
D.
Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from
concrete surface.
E.
Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing,
curing compound, or a combination of these as follows:
1.
Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days
with the following materials:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
3.8
A.
Water.
Continuous water-fog spray.
Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover
concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive
covers.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moistureretaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides
and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive.
Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material
and waterproof tape.
Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or
roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to
heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of
coating and repair damage during curing period.
PAVEMENT TOLERANCES
Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Elevation: 1/4 inch.
Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch.
Surface: Gap below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch.
Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch.
Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch.
Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2
inch.
Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge:
Length of dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches.
Joint Spacing: 3 inches.
Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
312313-9
SAN MARCOS UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
MISSION HILLS HIGH SCHOOL – CONCESSIONS/RESTROOM BLDG
3.9
gkkworks
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing for Portland Cement Concrete shall be sampled and tested in accordance with
the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Latest Edition, Section 2011.1.5.
B.
Samples for strength tests of each class of concrete placed each day shall be taken
not less than once a day, or not less than once for each 50 cubic yards of concrete, or
not less than once for each 2,000 square feet of surface area for slabs. Additional
samples for seven-day compressive strength tests shall be taken for each class of
concrete at the beginning of the concrete work or whenever the mix or aggregate is
changed.
C.
Concrete for testing shall be supplied by the CONTRACTOR at no cost to the Owner,
and the CONTRACTOR shall provide assistance and facilities to the INSPECTOR in
obtaining samples, and disposal and cleanup of excess material.
D.
Test results shall be reported in writing to District’s Representative, concrete
manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressivestrength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete
placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch
in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and
materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day
tests.
E.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device
may be permitted by District’s Representative but will not be used as sole basis for
approval or rejection of concrete.
F.
Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of
concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths,
or other requirements have not been met, as directed by District’s Representative.
G.
Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not
comply with specified requirements.
H.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to
determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
I.
Flood Tests: Before final acceptance, and after concrete has thoroughly cured, all
concrete pavement, including swales and curb & gutter, shall be water tested to ensure
proper drainage as directed by the Inspector. The Contractor shall provide water for
this purpose. The flooding shall be done by water tank truck. Concrete work where
water ponds and does not run off in a reasonable amount of time (1-hour), shall be
removed to the nearest score or joint line and replaced to provide proper drainage.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
312313-10
SAN MARCOS UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
MISSION HILLS HIGH SCHOOL – CONCESSIONS/RESTROOM BLDG
3.10
gkkworks
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that
does not comply with requirements in this Section.
B.
Drill test cores, where directed by District’s Representative, when necessary to
determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory
pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy
adhesive.
C.
Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after
placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as
possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
D.
Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign
material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for
Substantial Completion inspections.
3.11
CLEAN UP
A.
Do not allow any concrete spill or waste on planting area.
B.
Guard against graffiti; guarding shall be 24 hours a day if necessary. All marked,
defective or defaced material shall be replaced by removing the entire section between
construction joints.
C.
Remove all concrete debris and spill from all planting areas, leaving the area clean and
free of all noxious materials.
END OF SECTION 02751
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
312313-11
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
gkkworks
SECTION 321373 - PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.2
Expansion and contraction joints within cement concrete pavement.
Joints between cement concrete and asphalt pavement.
Division 32 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving" for constructing joints between
concrete and asphalt pavement.
Division 32 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for constructing joints in
concrete pavement.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B.
Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install jointsealant samples in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of
material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
C.
Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product
manufacturer.
D.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
E.
Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the
following:
1.
2.
F.
Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and
substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency, for sealants.
PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
321373-1
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
1.3
gkkworks
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications:
manufacturer.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C.
Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing:
Submit to joint-sealant
manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or
affect joint sealants.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.4
An employer of workers trained and approved by
Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and
other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum
adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.
Submit not fewer than six pieces of each type of material, including joint
substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous
materials.
Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the
Work.
For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions
for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.
Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation
data that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion
to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those
submitted.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life,
curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B.
Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to
prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures,
contaminants, or other causes.
1.5
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1.
2.
3.
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted
by joint-sealant manufacturer.
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted
by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
321373-2
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
4.
gkkworks
Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been
removed from joint substrates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed
in other Part 2 articles.
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials
that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of
service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on
testing and field experience.
B.
Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants:
manufacturer's full range.
2.3
A.
As selected by District’s Representative from
COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS
Multicomponent Jet-Fuel-Resistant Sealant for Concrete: Pourable, chemically curing
elastomeric formulation complying with the following requirements for formulation and
with ASTM C 920 for type, grade, class, and uses indicated:
1.
Urethane Formulation: Type M; Grade P; Class 12-1/2; Uses T, M, and, as
applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
a.
2.
Products:
1)
Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-300.
2)
Dow Corning Corporation; 888.
3)
Or equal
Coal-Tar-Modified Polymer Formulation: Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T
and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
a.
Products:
1)
2)
3)
3.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Gardox.
Tremco, Dymeric® 240
Or equal
Bitumen-Modified Urethane Formulation: Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T,
M, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
321373-3
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
a.
Products:
1)
2)
3)
B.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
Crafco Inc.; RoadSaver Silicone.
Dow Corning Corporation; 888.
Or equal
Type SL Silicone Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: Single-component, low-modulus,
neutral-curing, self-leveling silicone sealant complying with ASTM D 5893 for Type SL.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
2.4
Tremco Sealant/Waterproofing Division; Vulkem 202.
BASF Master Seal HLM-5000.
Or equal
Type NS Silicone Sealant for Concrete: Single-component, low-modulus, neutralcuring, nonsag silicone sealant complying with ASTM D 5893 for Type NS.
1.
C.
gkkworks
Crafco Inc.; RoadSaver Silicone SL.
Dow Corning Corporation; 890-SL.
Or equal
JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible
with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for
applications indicated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and
laboratory testing.
B.
Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of
diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side
adhesion of sealant.
C.
Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness
and width required to control sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant,
and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant.
D.
Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter
and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of
sealant.
PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
321373-4
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
2.5
A.
gkkworks
PRIMERS
Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for
adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction
joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting joint-sealant performance.
1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants
to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing
by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or
prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written
instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or
migration onto adjoining surfaces.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A.
General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for
products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use
of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C.
Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1.
2.
3.
Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials.
Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant
application and replace them with dry materials.
PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
321373-5
GROSSMONT-CUYAMACA COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
GROSSMONT COLLEGE – DISTRICT AUXILIARY OFFICES
D.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same
time backings are installed:
1.
2.
3.
E.
gkkworks
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.
Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning
or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to
ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1.
2.
Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and
that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
F.
Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written
instructions, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at
locations indicated.
3.4
A.
CLEANING
Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses
by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants
and of products in which joints occur.
3.5
PROTECTION
3.6
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes
so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,
despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged
or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations
with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.
END OF SECTION 321373
PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
321373-6